JP2019092948A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with enhanced performance effect.SOLUTION: A black star-shaped active display 95AK001 is displayed in an active display area 95AK013. The active display 95AK001 is enlarged to a size larger than the star of expectation degree suggestion display 95AK002, moved on the screen as if it was floating, and stopped on the right side of the screen. A performance is executed such that the active display 95AK001 is moved (operated) and fitted in one of the white stars of the expectation degree suggestion display 95AK022.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21-1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine which displays a title for notifying the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-101428, A

  In the gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the rendering effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display and controlling it in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Specific display executing means (for example, corresponding display area 95AK010) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, active display, hold display) corresponding to variable display;
And a suggestion effect execution unit (eg, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (eg, reach effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state.
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of indication effects different in proportion to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, reach effect of super reach A to E),
Expected degree suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 9 (H) to (J), FIG. 12, and FIG. 12) indicating the proportion controlled in the advantageous state by the execution of the suggested effect by displaying the expected degree suggested display 21-1 and FIG. 21-2) are further provided with expectation degree suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing
The expectation degree suggestion effect executing means can execute the expectation degree suggestion effect of changing the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion display by the specific indication acting on the expectation degree suggestion display (for example, FIG. 21-1, Figure 21-2).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The expected degree suggestive effect executing means can display the expected degree suggestive display by stepwise displaying a predetermined number of specific images according to a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by executing the suggested effect. And
A voice corresponding to the display of the specific image may be output (for example, FIG. 12, FIG. 21-1, and FIG. 21-2).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2),
The expected degree suggestive effect executing means can suggest a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by the number of specific images to be displayed,
The same sound may be output when the first predetermined number of specific images are displayed and when the second predetermined number of specific images are displayed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2),
The expected degree suggestive effect executing means can suggest a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by the number of specific images to be displayed,
Different sounds may be output when the first predetermined number of specific images are displayed and when the second predetermined number of specific images are displayed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The sound to be output may be changed stepwise depending on the number of the specific images displayed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The expected degree suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the expected degree suggestion effect of moving the specific image to a predetermined display area after displaying the specific image in a predetermined size (for example, 12 (B) to (E), (H) to (K), FIG. 21-1 and FIG. 21-2).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The expected degree suggestive effect executing means reduces the predetermined number of specific images according to the ratio controlled to the advantageous state by executing the suggested effect in a stepwise manner and displays the expected degree suggestive effect It may be executable.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
And title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggested effect;
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of fluctuation pattern and reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of advance production determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a preliminary production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 95AK. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 95AK. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 96AK. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 96AK. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 96AK. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation regarding the characteristic part 96AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of special symbols (also referred to as special figures) as plural types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the special symbol and the variation of the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the aspect which blink-displays a certain symbol is also contained in a fluctuation | variation. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stop as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special view". Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game". In addition, one type of special symbol display device for performing variable display of special symbols may be used.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be configured of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, upper and lower) in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Scroll display of direction and update display). Note that the special view game to be executed synchronously and the variable display of the decorative symbol are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area may be provided for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended, or an active display corresponding to the variable display under execution. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending storages. The number of pending storages corresponding to the first special view game is also referred to as a first pending storage number, and the number of pending storages corresponding to the second special view game is also referred to as a second pending storage number. The total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A includes the number of lighted LEDs. Thus, the first number of pending storages is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second number of pending storages according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening which is always kept in a predetermined open state where a gaming ball can enter, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a first special view game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (normally driven combination) forms a second start winning opening which is changed to a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type part having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing pieces Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the gaming ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start It is also said that the winning opening will be open.). When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a second special view game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electrically operated tulip type part.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning mouth door (for special electric combination) is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

  It is also called "winning" that the game ball enters each winning opening including the general winning opening 10. In particular, winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments of LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also referred to as a common game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the common-play game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is being held, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided which operates according to the effect.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like to fire the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided to provide a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting plate (lower plate) from which winning balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when a game ball passes passage gate 41 during a period during execution of the last game of a game (when a game ball passes passage gate 41, but a game game based on the passage can not be executed immediately) The regular game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

  In this common-play game, when a specific normal symbol (per-flat symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol is "per common-word". On the other hand, if an ordinary symbol other than the symbol per common drawing (general drawing loss symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". When it becomes "per common plan", opening control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the start winning opening (winning) during the period during execution of the special figure game, and the period controlled to the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state to be described later (start winning is generated When the special figure game based on the starting winning combination can not be executed immediately), the special figure game based on the entry is suspended from being executed up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  If special symbols (big hit symbols such as "7", the actual symbols differ according to the big hit type described later) are displayed as special symbols in the special figure game, they will be "big hits" and they will be big hit symbols If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from that is displayed stopped, it becomes "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (a lost symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is a "loss".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. In the open state, of an elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period in which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an open upper limit period. A cycle in which the special winning opening is thus opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute repeatedly until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the jackpot gaming state, the player can obtain a winning ball by advancing the gaming ball into the big winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

  In the "big hit", a big hit type is set. For example, a large winning opening opening mode (round number and opening upper limit period), a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) prepared a plurality of types, according to these The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type capable of obtaining many prize balls, or a jackpot type with few prize balls or hardly capable of obtaining prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the opening mode similar to the big hit gaming state at the time of some big hit classifications (the number of opening of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same Etc.) the big winning opening is open. As in the case of the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  In the short time state, control (time reduction control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure changes) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average spread map fluctuation time (period for changing the spread map) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of being “per spread map” in the spread game game, than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (in particular, the second special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, probability variation control is performed in which the probability that the display result is a "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability change state is a state more advantageous to the player because the probability change state of the special symbol is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The time saving state or the probability changing state continues until any one end condition such as the fact that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. It is also referred to as “the number of times cut (short in the number of times, short in the number of times definite change, etc.)” as the end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is the end condition.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than the special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a short time state, a definite change state, etc., and the display result in the common drawing game is "per common drawing". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special view game will be a "big hit" is a preset state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case of system reset) It is a state controlled in the same way as when the processing was not performed.

  A state in which the probability change control is being performed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state. In combination, the short time state is also referred to as a low probability high base state, the positive variation state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high certainty state and the low base state are also referred to as the high certainty base state.

  After the small hit gaming state ends, the change of the gaming state is not performed, and the control result of the special drawing game is continuously controlled to the previous gaming state to become the "small hit" (but the "small hit" occurs) When the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary to have a "small hit" as a display result of the special drawing game.

  The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the gaming ball passes the specific area, it may be controlled to be in the positive changing state after the big hit gaming state.

(Progress of progress etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of informing the progress of the game or boosting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The said effect is demonstrated below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 The operation may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, etc.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or (2) In response to the start of the special figure game, variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, the finalized decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived).

  In a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach aspect (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, variable display is performed for the decorative symbol not yet stopped and displayed. Is the aspect that is continuing.

  In addition, reach production is executed corresponding to becoming the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative design. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) in which the display result (display result of the special drawing game or display of the variable display of the decorative symbol) becomes “big hit” according to the presentation mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 The display result of the variable display of the symbol becomes "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7" etc.) is displayed on stop on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right". .

  If it is a "probable big hit" controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are aligned and stop displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state In the case of "non-probable variation big hit (usually big hit)" which is not controlled, even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be arranged to be stopped and displayed. In this case, an odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and an even number decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation symbol (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with a non-deterministic symbol, a promotion effect that finally becomes a "possibly large hit" may be executed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "small hit", a finalized combination symbol (for example, "a small hit combination defined in advance as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5). 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state of the same aspect as small hit gaming state) and when it becomes "small hit" , A fixed finalized design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "loss", the display mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, but the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (" Sometimes it is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). Also, when the display result is "loss", a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination ("reach loss") as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach aspect. There is also a case where the finalized decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach loss”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The advance notice effects include advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display in execution, and pre-reading notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be performed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol temporarily while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is resumed to make one variable display appear as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo series effect may be performed.

  During the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot during the jackpot to notify the jackpot gaming state is executed. As the jackpot effect, an effect of informing the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, during the small hitting during the small hitting game state which is notified the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit gaming state, and some of the big hit type (big hit type of the big hit gaming state of the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type that makes the subsequent gaming state highly probable) Depending on the state, the player may not know whether the present is in the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state by executing a common effect. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of suspension), execution of a common drawing game (including management of suspension), big hit It has a function to control gaming state, small hit gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effects control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when performing various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which stored contents are stored for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded on the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, input ports to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, and first hold. An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the common view hold display 25C and the like, and a solenoid drive signal) is configured.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass) from various switches (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls. A detection signal or the like indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, it is detected that the game ball has passed or entered.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized role and the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), as part of the control of the progress of the game, according to the progress of the game effect control command (command to specify (notice) the progress of the game etc.) effect control board Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main substrate 11 is relayed by the relay substrate 15 and supplied to the effect control substrate 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main substrate 11 (for example, display results of special drawing games (including a big hit type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special drawing games (described in detail later) ), Game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), command for designating occurrence of error and the like are included.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects (various effects corresponding to the progress of the game based on the effect control command received, It has a function of performing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, and the like.

  On the effect control board 12, a CPU 120 for effect control, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) (Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when detecting an operation by the player and appropriately indicating the contents of the operation). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes rendering based on a rendering execution instruction from the rendering control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for specifying a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. And the lamp control board 14 is supplied with a lamp signal (a signal for specifying the lamp on / off mode). Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9 and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the display control unit 123 controls voice output and lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes an audio output, control of lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 can count value data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects so as to be updateable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (image signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the voice control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. As in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of sub substrates may be provided for each function, or one sub substrate may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main substrate 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes gaming control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, first, the CPU 103 sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initialization is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port or the like), setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, on the image display device 5, screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before it becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, and the like) for progressing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code), and determines whether the data is normal (step S4) S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the gaming state is restored, and when the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by execution of the timer interrupt processing for game control described later. It will be

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command instructing recovery from power failure (step S 7). At the same time, the effect control command for specifying the gaming state before power interruption that has been backed up, or the effect control for specifying the display result of the special figure game in progress when the special figure game is being executed A command may be sent. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been made or that the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the setting of the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Then it enters loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening are performed via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 have been received (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hit, etc.) supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times and the like of the probability variation state) are output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt to realize management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, control of the playing state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the pass gate 41) management of execution and suspension of the common figure game, It enables the release control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per game". The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the general drawing reserve display is displayed by turning on the ordinary drawing suspension display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power failure occurs, processing for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission of an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, processing for detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a display result (including a big hit type) and a random value for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, processing may be executed to determine whether the display result or the variation pattern is read ahead. After storing the hold information and the number of held memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of start winnings, the number of held memories, and the pre-reading judgment is performed on the effect control board 12 . For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the effect control command at the start winning combination set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each processing (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process processing, transmission setting for transmitting a rendering control command corresponding to each processing to the rendering control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special view game or the second special view game based on the presence / absence of the hold information and the like. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" in the case of "big hit" Are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (one of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special view game using the second special view may be executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view (also referred to as special view 2 priority digest). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order termination).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random value are assigned to determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other determinations on the main substrate 11 and various determinations on the effect control substrate 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used using random value for variation pattern determination based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit" or the like. The process of deciding on etc. is included. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (such as presence or absence of reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is designated, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process is ended.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol to be the display result of the special symbol is stop displayed (derived) The process for setting up is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when the display result is “loss”, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time cut is completed and control is made in the time saving state or the positive change state. When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set the big winning opening to the open state based on the display result becoming "big hit" etc. It is done. When the special winning opening is opened, processing for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period for setting the big winning opening in an open state, and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set, for example, in accordance with which jackpot type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6", End the process during the big hit open.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the set upper limit number of times, or when the upper limit number of times reached the big hit gaming state Includes the process of setting for terminating the program. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the big hit release post-processing ends.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, processing to wait until waiting time corresponding to a period during which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of big hit gaming state, processing corresponding to the end of big hit gaming state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and short time control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process for setting the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit open pre-processing ends.

  The small hit open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the small hit gaming state end timing comes, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "10", and the small hit open processing is ended.

  The small hitting end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing is ended.

(Main operation of presentation control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. In addition, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S75, an effect control process process is performed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decoration light such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various rendering devices is performed, such as driving operation. Further, with regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number updating process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S73. Before returning to the process of step S73, another process may be performed.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes preread advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the presentation control command at the start winning combination transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Moreover, the process for displaying a pending | holding display is performed based on the pending | holding memory number specified from the said production control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11 or the like. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the fluctuation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decision decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, reach effect and various types The presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the manner and timing of execution start thereof are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) in which the determination result and the like are reflected is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S 171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or the command specifying that the main decorative object 11 is made to stop and display the decorative symbol is received In response to what has been done, the fixed decoration pattern that is the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect processing ends.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special view, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command designating start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6 Update to On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit middle effect processing. In addition, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost" when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started. Thus, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the rendering process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hit medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of a command specifying termination of the small hit gaming state from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit ending effect. Update to a certain "5" and end small hitting medium effect processing.

  The small hitting end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hitting end effect processing is ended.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit internal effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit inside effect processing, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the command specifying the end of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11 Update to 7 ′ ′ and complete the big hit internal rendering process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., and performs various effect control of ending effect at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value, and the ending effect processing is ended.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the gaming media and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the light-off of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device of Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

(Description of feature portion 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining types of fluctuation patterns and reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the change display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach loser fluctuation patterns PA1-1, PA1-2 in which the display result is "loss". Change pattern of the display of the variation pattern PA2-1-PA2-6, PA3-1-PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit", and the display result becomes "loss" because the form of the variable display of the decorative design becomes the reach mode. Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are performed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggested effect which suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown in the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is: normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B < <The order of Super Reach A is higher. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines becoming a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. In addition, during the production of the reach of the super reach, there may be a case in which the development presentation is performed to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A, and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the degree of reliability develops into a super reach one stage higher, a variation pattern in which the degree of reliability develops by two or more stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern may be provided in which the development effect is performed a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest degree of reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E with the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach by display only, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and voice. As described above, notification of a title is performed by more rendering devices in the case of the highly reliable reach than in the case of the less reliable reach. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively heard, and the effect of presentation is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (such as gothic and Mincho type) and the typeface (such as a line and a calligraphy) may be made different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect contents of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following rendering operation is executed by the rendering control CPU 120 executing rendering control process processing based on the rendering control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of super reach according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 on the "left" and the "right" is stopped to be in the reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of becoming the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9D, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the introduction of the super reach effect (also referred to as super reach effect) is ended, for example. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the letter "SP reach A") is displayed, and a voice (here, "Super reach A") corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8 , And the title of Super Reach A is informed. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The following part of the reach effect of Super Reach A to be performed is executed. The production in which the characters face each other is also referred to as battle production, and it becomes a big hit when the ally character wins in the battle production, and loses when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when displaying words on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to displaying in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like as a subtitle.

(Super reach B)
In the case of becoming the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introductory portion of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9F, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is a title 31AK005 of super reach B (here Then, the letters "SP reach B" are displayed, and a voice corresponding to the title name of reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. Ru. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9G, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 face each other. The following part of the reach effect of Super Reach B to be performed is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect. By doing this, since the title can be notified after showing the introduced part of the super reach effect to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the title notification.

  Also, with Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ... and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introductory part until it is alert | reported, super reach presentation is performed in a common presentation mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is to be achieved after the start of the super reach effect, and which title is to be notified. In Super Reach A and Super Reach B, it is not limited to completely sharing the presentation mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by watching the presentation, etc. The parts may be in a common presentation mode. For example, in the introductory part of super reach A and super reach B, super reach production (for example, production which displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a mode related to a title notified thereafter You may By doing this, the rendering effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the rendering. In this manner, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31 AK 007 of the Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP reach D”) is displayed on a part of the center of the image display device 5 At the same time, the sound of the title of Super Reach D is notified by the speaker 8 outputting a voice corresponding to the title of Reach (in this case, "kill the enemy"). As described above, in Super Reach D, a title is notified at the start of Super Reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree indication 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but it does not have to completely match with the big hit reliability of the reach.

  In addition, the alerting | reporting by the audio | voice of super reach D is not alert | reporting a title name as it is, but the content of reach is alert | reported. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is made different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification form of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31 AK 007 and the expectation degree indication 31 AK 008 continue to be displayed by being reduced in the upper right portion or the like of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can grasp the expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. In addition, in FIG.9 (I), although the production | presentation content in common with FIG.9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B) is shown, the super reach production only for super reach D may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9J, the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, and the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. Ru.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of the Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP reach E”) is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5 Thus, the title of Super Reach E is informed. In Super Reach E, notification of a title by voice is not performed. Also, in conjunction with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is the enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other To be executed. As described above, in the Super Reach E, a title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low hit probability, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), ( H)). By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the case of super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of the super reach with a high hit probability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach reach production with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title will be announced at the start. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach, which have low jackpot reliability, In E, the title was notified at the start of the Super Reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of Super Reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reach effect.

(Display area of title)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is The title is notified in a part (second area) of the screen of. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a large hit reliability, since title notification is performed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability, effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

  The method of varying the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be optionally changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit probability, title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low degree of reliability. Further, in the case where the display area to be notified of the title is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the place to be displayed may be made different.

(Expected degree indication indication)
In this embodiment, super reach A and super reach B with high hit reliability do not display anticipation indication in the title notification in super reach A and super reach D with lower hit reliability than super reach A and super reach B. In the title notification in, the expectation indication was displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effects from being disturbed. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E whose jackpot reliability is lower than Super Reach D, the expectation indication is not displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying the expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in the low reliability reach. Note that the expectation indication may be displayed on at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, but may indicate the degree of expectation with a meter or gauge, or correspond to the degree of expectation You may make it display the numerical value. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, in the case of showing by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased by enabling display of a half equivalent (half) of black stars.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach presentation is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In addition, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach presentation. Moreover, by performing as described above, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed since it is possible to improve the rendering effect regardless of the display end timing.

  In addition, although it is abbreviate | omitted about the production | presentation operation | movement of the reach production of the super reach C here, the title alert | report according to big hit reliability and an expectation degree suggestion display should just be performed, for example.

(Decided production)
After each reach effect is performed, when it is time to derive the display result (end of the variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is “big hit” is performed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit", and a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the determined effect that the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the allied character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The finalized design is derived. In addition, if a display result is "loss", the image which shows that the ally character loses is displayed, and the finalized decoration pattern used as a reach loss combination is derived | led-out.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a clear title notification.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, during the reach effect of super reach, the decorative symbol is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display, but in the reach effect How to make the display of the decoration pattern of is optional. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying a character that is permanently displayed during hold display, active display, variable display or display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach. It may be At that time, during low-reliability reach effects such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively expected by the reach effect with low reliability, and to be able to pay attention to the reach effect in the highly reliable reach effect.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation when the development rendering is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the development effect is performed when the reach effect of the super reach D is being performed (the title notification of the super reach D is being performed), as shown in FIG. 11B. As shown, an effect such that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is performed. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing title notification by display and sound, title notification by display and sound is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 11 (B), but may be an effect in which a crack is gradually broken on the screen, or a sandstorm (display as if it is broken) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, unexpected effects can be performed. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gasse, such as an effect in which a reach is not developed, although a crack gradually enters the screen.

(Expected degree suggestive production)
In the example of the rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (H), a black star indicating the expected degree is displayed from the beginning that the expected degree indication 31AK008 indicates the expected degree, but five white stars are displayed at first, It may be made to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indication 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation degree indication 31AK021 A presentation is performed that fits within one of the white stars. At this time, an audio "pin" indicating that the black star indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) outputted from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black star is highlighted as if it were illuminated. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect is finished.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation indication indicates one step at a time, but two or more black stars The degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. In addition, half black stars may be displayed to increase the expectation by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Also, there may be a case where the voice is not output. By doing this, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation increasing at one time, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expectation increasing as it is displayed on the white star indicating the expectation degree indication. You may make it perform such an effect.

(Demonstration mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different rendering mode, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the rendering based on the command is executed in a different rendering mode. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif, the sound outputted from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are example rendering operation examples of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion rendering in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the rendering mode. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation degree suggestion effects are performed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 different in the effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is specified, as shown in FIG. 12G, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. Moreover, the expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a rhombus.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12H, a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12I, the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation indication 31AK024 A presentation is performed that fits within one of the white diamonds of. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pong" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree indication display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted as if illuminated. Thus, depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title, and the effect is achieved. improves.

  Although FIG. 12 shows an example of the rendering operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, another reach rendering (title notification, expectation degree suggestion rendering) is performed depending on the rendering mode (state when the reach rendering is performed) May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is to be notified or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing this, effects according to the player's preferences can be performed, and the effects of the effects can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree indication display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect of increasing the number of black stars in a stepwise manner is performed, but the expectation degree It is also possible to execute an expectation indication effect of decreasing the number of indications suggesting a. Such an expected degree suggestive effect may be performed in addition to or in place of the expected degree suggestive effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of developmental direction)
In the case of executing an expectation degree indication effect of increasing the display degree indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree indication display step by step, the development effect may be performed after the display indicating the expectation degree is increased. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed not in stages but at one time. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 5 The development effect for displaying the image 31AK031 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the characters “SP reach C”) is displayed, and thus the super The title of Reach C is informed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, an expectation degree indication 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, it is displayed at one time. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect may be performed in which the title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation change.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the notice effect, a title notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed according to a notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, while the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black and the voice corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), a title preview in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title preview is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title preview is executed. In the title preview shown in FIG. 14, there may be a case where the display mode (display color) of the title changes after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed other than black from the start of display of the title.

  In addition, when a title advance notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, an audio according to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Further, the title notification by audio may be performed after the display mode (display color) of the title changes. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after change.

(Title execution timing)
It is preferable to execute notification of a title during reach at a timing other than the execution timing of a presentation (specific presentation) such as a preliminary presentation production or a development presentation in which the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing this, when the title is notified once, an effect of improving the expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the advance presentation effect determination process for determining the presence or absence of the execution of the advance presentation effect and the presentation mode. The preview control effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance presentation effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (presence or absence of the execution of the preview of the title) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "loss", the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. The display color of the Super Reach title changes from "Black" to "Red" or from "Black" to "Fruit" as shown in Fig. 16A. What changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the rendering effect is improved.

  In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be "fruit pattern" . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is performed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the display color changing. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the display period of the title is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine one of the changing timings. Then, in the case of a super reach (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in which the display period of the title is short, the number of changing timing may be one or less than the super reach in which the display period of the title is long.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and in the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16B in the special mode. Determine the display color of the title at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the preview of the title different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character's serif in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After the display color of the Super Reach title is determined, the display color of the character's speech (the presence or absence of the serif announcement) in the reach effect of the Super Reach is determined (Step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "loss", the display color of the speech in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display color of the speech in the reach production changes from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order) Big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the speech. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the speech, and the rendering effect is improved. It should be noted that, for those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the display color changing. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the jackpot reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the presentation style of the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the same presentation mode (display color) is included in the title preview and the speech preview, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same presentation mode is obtained. Also, the big hit reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the change timing of the presentation mode with the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big hit reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing this, it is possible to pay attention to the change timings of the title preview and the speech preview.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, in the special mode, the display color of the speech may be determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that in place of the speech notice, a notice effect may be executed to give notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided, and the big hit reliability may be different according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the speech in the reach effect or when it is determined not to be the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31 S001; No), the execution presence or effect mode is determined for other advance effects (step AK31 S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance presentation effect determination process is ended.

  In this embodiment, in the case of the super reach, it is possible to execute the title preview and the speech preview, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the low reliability super reach), the title preview. And at least one of the serif announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title preview and the speech preview have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and may be changed according to, for example, the type of super reach. By doing this, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of effect modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title preview and the speech preview. By doing this, the effects are diversified and the effect is enhanced. In the title preview and the speech preview, the number of playable presentation modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of playable production modes may be the same. By doing this, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Effect production)
When the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes, a presentation may be performed that indicates that the presentation mode changes. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a speech may be performed. Then, after the effect presentation is performed, the presentation mode (display color) of the title or speech may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image and the like) of the action effect may be common to any of the title and words. Note that there may be cases where the presentation mode of the title or speech does not change despite the action presentation being performed. In the case of executing the effect presentation, the presence / absence of the execution of the operation presentation, the execution timing, and the presentation mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title preview and the speech preview. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31 S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the function presentation) may be different according to the presentation mode of the action presentation, The ratio (the ratio of acting on which effect mode) of the serif announcement and which presentation mode changes may be different, or the ratio of what color (in which stage) changes may be different. . By executing such an operation effect, the player becomes aware of which one of the title and the speech to act when the operation effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of effect effects and effect modes may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing this, it is possible to execute the action presentation according to the presentation mode, and the presentation effect is improved.

  As another example of such effect presentation, at least one of the presentation aspect (display color) of either the title or the speech according to the presentation content of the reach presentation (for example, the action of the character, the presentation content in the battle presentation, etc.) May change. By doing this, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic parts described in the above embodiment are not essential components, and can be appropriately omitted.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Although the term “sub-liquid crystal” is used here, the sub-display device may be configured of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub-liquid crystal, various effects such as display of preliminary effects and hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the title notification, the title or expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title in the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the indication of the degree of expectation. By doing this, it is possible to easily understand the title and the expectation indication which can display the title and the expectation indication without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a reach effect title as a suggested effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to title notification (information that mainly displays characters) regarding other effects. May be For example, in the case of executing pre-reading zone effect in which the background image in the image display device 5 is shifted to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) different as the pre-notice effect, for example, The present invention may be applied to the title notification of When presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Eliminate an enemy using a stick controller, etc.”), and execute a mission effect that will be in the player's favor when the mission is achieved. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 1 of Feature 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is performed, and then the display result is displayed ( 10 (B)-(D). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for urging the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected in the operation valid period. The display result may be indicated by displaying the outcome of the battle effect or by temporarily stopping the display result. By doing this, since the display result is indicated according to the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the super reach in the modification in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the character 31AK041 which is a friend character and the character 31AK042 which is an enemy character are displayed. As shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to 18 (I), reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 are confronted is executed.

  Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, the small button image 31AK043 and the restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thus, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that operation effects are to be executed are prepared. And big hit reliability differs according to which operation production image is displayed and operation production is performed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is performed during the reach effect may be changed to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is a large button image 31AK047. Change to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18H, the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18I, the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, an operation effect indicating that the operation effect image changes when the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the operation effect is performed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18J, the control line 31AK044 is erased and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed at the central portion as shown in FIG. 18K before a predetermined time when the display result is derived. , A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 18 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. Thereafter, at the end of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a finalized decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. When an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation valid period, an image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image The jackpot confidence is high. Even when the operation effect image with a low degree of reliability is displayed, the operation effect image with a high degree of reliability may be changed during the reach effect, so the effect of presentation is improved, and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the rendering operation example shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the notification of the reach title and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but in parallel with the reach rendering and the operation rendering shown in FIG. It may be performed. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (presence or absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence or absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG.

(Modified Example 2 of Feature 31AK)
A suggestion display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. For example, the shutter effect that performs the first indication display and the reach title effect that performs the second indication display may be performed. In the shutter effect, after the start of variable display, an effect of covering the screen with shutter display is performed. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title preview of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined in another process.

  The specific image is an image of high hit reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In any of the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect execution, when the display is performed with the fruit pattern image, the big hit reliability is higher than the time when the display is not performed with the fruit pattern image. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including each of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, the pattern of images other than a fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image which shows big hit reliability when shutter production and reach title production are performed. For example, white images <blue images <red images <fruit pattern images may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter, a reach title of red characters, etc.). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing a shutter display and a reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, notification that the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The light emission control of the common sound and the game effect lamp 9 indicates to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. In performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification on the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display in the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, at the time of the shutter effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The downward arrow indicates the variable display of the left, middle and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), the super reach effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed small at the upper right of the screen and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, characters of "battle reach" indicating that reach effect with battle effect is to be executed are displayed.

  Further, at the time of the reach title effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Tsui Tsui”. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the indication to be displayed is smaller than that of the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed by outputting the specific sound. Although the case where the output period is completely divided has been described for the common sound and the specific sound, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "battle won!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit was decided by having won the battle. When the battle effect is over, it returns to the variable display screen by the original number symbol. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped, and a big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this manner, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high hit probability has been displayed.

  In addition, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from being obscured by overlapping execution timings.

  The determination (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) relating to the shutter effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. At that time, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31 AKS 002 of FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily performed. Further, the determination of the reach title effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination of the shutter effect.

(Additional note on feature part 31AK)
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Indication production execution means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) which can execute suggestion production (for example, reach production) which suggests that it is controlled to a state, and title informing means (for example, production The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 9 (D), (F)). ).

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  (2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period May be implemented in a common manner (eg, FIG. 9C).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which suggestion effect is performed, and the interest is improved.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) indicative of being controlled to the advantageous state at a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution. It may be executable, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

  According to such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained even after the notification of the title.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the suggestion effect execution unit is configured to set at least a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and (2) It is possible to execute 2 indication effects (for example, reach effects of super reach D and super reach E), and in the second indication effect, the title notification means may start the second indication effect from the start of the second indication effect. The title corresponding to may be notified.

  According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be performed, the effect of the effect is improved.

  (5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the ratio in which the first suggestion effect is executed is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher than when the second suggestion effect is executed. It is also good.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), the suggestion effect execution unit is capable of executing the suggestion effect in a presentation mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period. May be

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), a detection means (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player and a specific display corresponding to the detection means ( For example, specific display execution means (for example, CPU 120 for presentation control) which performs small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) is further provided, and the specific display execution means is the first specific display as the specific display. (For example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first specific display can be displayed. After displaying the first specific display in the non-effective period of (1) Change the specific display to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)), and in the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after change May be performed (for example, FIG. 18 (J), (K)).

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), a first indication indicating that the indication size is the first size as an indication suggesting an expectation of control to the advantageous state (FIG. 19) (A) display by shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown at (a)), and a second suggested display whose display size is the second size (the display at the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19 (d) The display unit (for example, the image display device 5 and the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the two-sized reach title image 31AK062 etc.) is further provided, and the display unit is a plurality of types of elements having different modes (FIG. 19A) (D), the component E1 (banana), the component E2 (melon), the component E3 (apple), the component E4 (watermelon), the component E5 (strawberry), etc. Images (such as fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) can be displayed, and either of the first indication and the second indication can be displayed in a pattern including the specific image. A plurality of elements are displayed so as to be included in any of the first indication display and the second indication display (in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) May be displayed to include the elements E1 to E5).

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

(Description 1 about feature 38SH)
Next, the feature portion 38SH of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characterizing portion 38SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes display means. The display means can display the related display related to the predetermined state and the specific display. Then, even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

  In the following description, for the purpose of preventing the description from being complicated, the related display will be described by taking a specific telop image as an example. However, the related display is not limited to the illustrated telop image, and is applicable to various telop images associated with a predetermined state.

  Here, in a narrow sense, a telop is an image in which character information moves in a band-like frame display as in the example of the rendering operation shown in FIGS. 20-1 to 20-43. There is no frame display, and only text information is displayed. The telop in a broad sense may be an aspect in which the character information moves, or an aspect in which the character information does not move. The character information is information composed of a character string, characters, symbols, pictograms, etc., and for example, information presented for the purpose of informing the player in any way, and information presenting information related to effects Etc. The character information is not limited to information composed of existing character strings, characters, symbols, pictograms and the like, and may include fictitious character strings, characters, symbols, pictograms and the like.

  In the example of the rendering operation shown in FIGS. 20-1 to 20-43, mainly, a telop including character information displayed for the purpose of notifying the player in any way will be described. On the other hand, as an example of the telop containing the character information related to the effect, when displaying the telop when the effect for outputting the music is being executed, the telop including the character information indicating the lyrics of the music being output Can be displayed. That is, although the character information indicating the lyrics of the music is not displayed for the purpose of informing the player in any way, it is character information related to the effect.

(Exemplary operation example 1 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20A shows an example of the effect operation regarding the feature portion 38SH. In this example, as a related display related to the predetermined state, a display of a telop image for notifying that a jackpot middle effect is being performed will be described as an example. Further, in this example, as a specific display, a display of a right-handed instruction image for instructing to launch the game ball toward the right play area will be described as an example.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 a telop image notifying that the jackpot effect is being executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit telop image 38SH10 extending in the left and right directions in the upper area of the display area of the image display device 5. The big hit telop image 38SH10 is an image of an aspect in which the character information 38SH11 of "LIVE BONUS" is displayed. In this example, it is informed that the jackpot effect is being executed because the character information 38SH11 with "LIVE BONUS" of the jackpot telop image 38SH10 can be recognized.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 a right-handed instruction image instructing to launch the game ball toward the right game area. For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed command image 38SH20 in the upper right area of the display area of the image display device 5. The right strike instruction image 38SH20 is an image of an aspect in which character information “right strike” and an arrow “→” are alternately displayed so as to form a ring, and rotate clockwise. In this example, by displaying the right strike instruction image 38SH20, it is instructed to launch the game ball toward the right play area.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10, for example, on the condition that the big hit middle effect is being executed. Also, for example, when it is detected that the game ball is launched toward the left game area despite being in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right strike instruction image 38SH20 . Therefore, when it is detected that the game ball is launched toward the left game area despite being in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the right strike instruction image 38SH20. Will be displayed at the same time.

  Here, the plurality of images displayed on the image display device 5 have their display priorities set. When the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays a plurality of images having different display priorities, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having a high display priority on the front of an image having a display priority lower than that of the image. In this example, it is assumed that the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 has a higher display priority than the big hit telop image 38SH10. In that case, since the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed superimposed on the front of the big hit telop image 38SH10, the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is hidden in the right-handed hit image 38SH20, making recognition difficult or unrecognizable, and the big hit telop The contents of the image 38SH10 may be difficult to recognize or unrecognizable. In the example illustrated in FIG. 20A, a part of the character string "BONUS" in the character string "LIVE BONUS" is hidden in the right-handed instruction image 38SH20, making it difficult to recognize, and the contents of the jackpot telop image 38SH10 are recognized It is difficult. As described above, when part or all of the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is difficult or unrecognizable, the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 informs that the big hit is being performed during the big hit. It becomes difficult to recognize or unrecognizable.

  Therefore, in this example, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10. In the example shown in FIG. 20A, as shown in FIG. 20A by moving the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 from the right to the left from the state shown in FIG. The whole of the character string "LIVE BONUS" moves to a position where it is not hidden in the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and can be recognized, and the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 informs that the big hit is being performed during the big hit Can be recognized.

  When the character of the character information 38SH11 reaches the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, it is not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH11 is not displayed as a result of moving the character information 38SH11 from the right to the left, the effect control CPU 120 moves the character information 38SH11 from the right to the left of the display area of the image display device 5 Display again to move.

  In addition, the display position of the telop image such as the big hit telop image 38SH10 may be any position in the display area of the image display device 5 as long as it is a display position where the visibility of the effect during the big hit or variable display is not easily disturbed. . For example, the effect control CPU 120 can display a telop image extending vertically in the right or left area in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display a telop image extending in an oblique direction.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20A, it is possible to display the big hit telop image 38SH10 notifying that the big hit is being performed and the right hitting instruction image 38SH20, and the right hitting on the big hit telop image 38SH10 Even when the instruction image 38SH20 is superimposed and displayed, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10.

(Exemplary operation example 2 for the feature portion 38SH)
FIG. 20B shows another example of the effect operation regarding the feature portion 38SH. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  In this example, even if it is difficult or impossible to recognize the content of the jackpot telop image 38SH10 from one character information by displaying a plurality of same character information of "LIVE BONUS" on the jackpot telop image 38SH10, The contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized from plural pieces of the same character information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-2 (A), two pieces of character information 38SH111 and character information 38SH112 of "LIVE BONUS" are displayed in the big hit telop image 38SH10, but the character information 38SH111 has a character string "LIVE" Part of the character does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and is cut off, and it is difficult to recognize the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 from the character information 38SH111. Further, in the character information 38SH112, a part of the character string "BONUS" is hidden in the right hitting indication image 38SH20, and it is difficult to recognize the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 also from the character information 38SH112. However, some recognizable characters of the character string "LIVE" of the character information 38SH111, a recognizable character string "BONUS" of the character information 38SH111, and a recognizable character string "LIVE" of the character information 38SH112 And the recognizable part of the character string “BONUS” in the character information 38SH112, it is possible to recognize that the character information “LIVE BONUS” is displayed in the big hit telop image 38SH10, It becomes possible to recognize that the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is to notify that the big hit medium effect is being executed.

  Also in this example, by moving the character information 38SH111 and the character information 38SH112 of the big hit telop image 38SH10, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be more easily recognized. In the example illustrated in FIG. 20-2, the character information 38SH111 and the character information 38SH112 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 are moved from the right to the left from the state illustrated in FIG. As shown, the recognizable range of the character string "LIVE" of the character information 38SH111 and the recognizable range of the character string "BONUS" of the character information 38SH112 are changed. That is, by moving the character information 38SH111 and the character information 38SH112, the range of the recognizable character string in each character information changes, so that the character information is not moved and the characters that are difficult to recognize or unrecognizable remain unchanged. It becomes easier to recognize that the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is to notify that the big hit medium effect is being executed, as compared with the case where it is.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20B, the big hit telop image 38SH10 notifying that the big hit medium effect is being executed and the right hit instruction image 38SH20 can be displayed, and the right hit on the big hit telop image 38SH10 Even when the instruction image 38SH20 is superimposed and displayed, the content of the telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by displaying a plurality of identical character information on the big hit telop image 38SH10.

(Exemplary operation example 3 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20C shows another example rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can output from the speakers 8L and 8R a big hit medium music related to a big hit middle effect performed in the big hit gaming state. For example, the CPU 120 for production control executes live production in which the character shows a song or dance as a jackpot production, and outputs a music corresponding to the song or dance as a jackpot music.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 can output a different type of big hit medium music according to the big hit type. In the case of such an aspect, the music to be shown in the live effect to be executed as the jackpot effect may be made different depending on the jackpot type. According to such an aspect, it is possible to easily recognize which jackpot type of jackpot gaming state the player who listened to the jackpot music in the middle of the jackpot.

  For example, it is sufficient to make the big hit medium music differ between the case of “probable big hit” and the case of “non-positive big hit”. In particular, in the case of a "something big hit", by adopting an impressive intro music as a middle hit music, the finalized decoration pattern that will be a big hit combination depending on the big hit gaming state being started, or By outputting the big hit medium music in response to the derived one, it is possible to rapidly increase the interest from the start of the big hit gaming state or at the point when the determined decoration symbol to be the big hit combination is derived.

  In addition, when performing a promotion effect that indicates that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved as a big hit middle stage effect, the big hit middle song by adopting a big hit middle song corresponding to "non-probable variation big hit" as a big hit middle song, a big hit At the start of the gaming state, or when the finalized decoration symbol to be a big hit combination is derived, it may be notified that the big hit type is "probable variation big hit". In the case of such an aspect, in response to the promotion effect being executed as a big hit in the big hit, the big hit in the middle music, from the big hit in the middle corresponding to the "non-deterministic big hit", the big hit in the middle corresponding to the "probable big hit" It may be changed to At that time, when outputting the big hit medium music corresponding to the "probable variation big hit", it may be outputted from the intro of the music, or may be outputted from the chorus part of the music. According to such an aspect, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the player's interest improvement by the promotion effect.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can output, from the speakers 8L and 8R, a right-handed instruction sound instructing to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an audio such as "Aim for the right" as a right-handed instruction audio.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a big hit medium song on condition that the big hit medium effect is being executed. Also, for example, when it is detected that the game ball is launched toward the left game area despite being in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a right-handed instruction sound. Therefore, when it is detected that the game ball is launched toward the left game area despite being in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously performs the big hit medium song and the right hitting instruction voice It will be output. In that case, there is a possibility that both the big hit medium song and the right-handed instruction voice may be difficult or impossible to recognize.

  In addition, as described above, despite the fact that the game ball is detected to be launched toward the left game area despite being in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the right. The hit indication image 38SH20 is simultaneously displayed, but the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is hidden behind the right hit indication image 38SH20, making it difficult or impossible to recognize, and the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 being difficult to recognize or unrecognizable Sometimes it becomes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-3 (A), since the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is not hidden in the right-handed instruction image 38SH20, it is informed that the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is executing a big hit during the big hit It can be visually recognized that it is Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes it easier to aurally recognize the right-handed instruction sound by, for example, increasing the volume of the right-handed instruction sound more than the volume of the big hit medium music. Here, in order to increase the volume of the right hitting instruction sound more than the volume of the big hit middle music, there is a method of lowering the volume of the right hitting middle music to raise the volume of the right hitting instruction sound and lowering the sound volume of the big hit middle music There are a method of not raising the volume of the hit instruction sound and a method of raising the volume of the right-turn instruction sound without reducing the volume of the middle hit music.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-3 (B), a part of the character string "BONUS" in the character string "LIVE BONUS" is hidden in the right-handed instruction image 38SH20, making it difficult to recognize, and the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 are visual Is difficult to recognize. Therefore, in this example, the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is produced during a big hit by making the volume of the big hit medium music louder than the volume of the right hitting instruction voice and making it easy to aurally recognize the middle hit music. It makes it possible to recognize that it is to notify that it is being executed. Here, in order to make the volume of the big hit medium music louder than the volume of the right hitting instruction sound, there is a method of lowering the volume of the right hitting instruction sound to raise the volume of the big hit middle music and lowering the volume of the right hitting instruction sound There are a method of not raising the volume of the song during the big hit and a method of raising the volume of the song during the big hit without lowering the volume of the right-handed instruction sound.

  The effect control CPU 120 can specify the position of the character information 38SH11 based on, for example, the effect control pattern and the effect time elapsed since the start of the display of the big hit telop image 38SH10. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction image 38SH20, the character information 38SH11 instructs the right-handed operation based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the display of the big hit telop image 38SH10 started. It can be determined whether the image 38SH20 hides.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20-3, it is possible to display the big hit telop image 38SH10 notifying that the big hit is being performed and the right hit instruction image 38SH20, and the right hit instruction to the telop image 38SH10 Even when the image 38SH20 is superimposed and displayed, the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by adjusting the volume of at least one of the volume of the big hit medium music and the volume of the right-handed instruction sound.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may output, for example, a voice of “LIVE BONUS” from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that control is in the big hit gaming state. In such an embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 20-3 (A), it is visually recognized that the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is to notify that the big hit is being performed. If possible, make the volume of the right-handed instruction sound louder than the volume of the sound with "LIVE BONUS", and the content of the jackpot telop image 38SH10 is visually as shown in the example shown in FIG. 20-3 (B). If recognition is difficult, the sound volume of "LIVE BONUS" may be made larger than the sound volume of the right-handed instruction sound. At that time, the volume of the big hit medium tune may or may not be changed.

(Description 2 about feature 38SH)
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH can display a second related display different from the related display as a specific display displayed superimposed on the first related display. Then, even when the second related display is superimposed and displayed on the first related display, the content of the first related display can be recognized.

(Example operation of rendering operation about feature 38SH 4)
FIG. 20D shows another example rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH. In this example, as a first related display, display of a telop image for notifying that pre-reading zone effect is being performed will be described as an example. Further, in this example, as a second related display, display of a telop image for teaching a focus point of the pre-reading zone effect will be described as an example.

  As described above, the pre-reading zone effect is an effect of transitioning to a plurality of zones in which the background image and the effect mode are different. The effect control CPU 120 is a super reach or display in the variable display of the target corresponding to the pending information subjected to the pre-reading determination based on the determination result of the start winning, the number of pending storages, the pre-reading determination, etc. It is possible to execute a pre-reading zone effect to predict that the result will be a "big hit". The effect control CPU 120 can execute pre-reading zone effect across a plurality of variable displays performed before the variable display of the target, including the variable display of the target.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 a telop image notifying that pre-reading zone effect is being executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, the effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 extending vertically in the area on the right side in the display area of the image display device 5. The zone telop image 38SH30 is an image of an aspect in which the character information 38SH31 of "LIVE ZONE" is displayed. In this example, the fact that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed is informed by the fact that the character information 38SH31 with "LIVE ZONE" of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 a telop image that teaches the focus point of the pre-reading zone effect. The effect control CPU 120 displays the attention point telop image 38SH40 in the lower area of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The attention point telop image 38SH40 is an image of an aspect in which the character information 38SH41 of "Attention to members of the center!" Is displayed. In this example, as a pre-reading zone effect, a live effect in which a plurality of characters perform songs and dances is executed as the pre-reading zone effect, and according to which character is located at the center at the timing of chorus of music, pre-reading zone effect There is a difference in the jackpot expectation of the variable display that has been targeted for advance notice. In this example, the point of interest of the pre-reading zone effect is taught by the fact that the character information 38SH41 of “focus on the member of the center!” Of the point of interest telop image 38SH40 is recognizable.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 under the condition that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the attention point telop image 38SH40 on condition that the music of the live effect being executed as the pre-reading zone effect shifts to the chorus. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously displays the zone telop image 38SH30 and the attention point telop image 38SH40 when the live effect music being executed as the pre-reading zone effect shifts to the chorus.

  In this example, it is assumed that the attention point telop image 38SH40 has a higher display priority than the zone telop image 38SH30. In that case, since the attention point telop image 38SH40 is displayed overlapping the front of the zone telop image 38SH30, the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is hidden in the attention point telop image 38SH40, making it difficult or unrecognizable, and the zone telop The contents of the image 38SH30 may be difficult to recognize or unrecognizable. In the example shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), a part of the character string "ZONE" of the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden in the focused point telop image 38SH40 and it becomes difficult to recognize, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is recognized It is difficult. As described above, it is recognized that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 informs that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed when part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult or unrecognizable. It becomes difficult or unrecognizable.

  Therefore, in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example shown in FIG. 20-4, the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is moved from the lower side to the upper side as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B) from the state shown in FIG. 20-4 (A). The character string "LIVE ZONE" moves to a position where it does not hide in the attention point telop image 38SH40 and can be recognized, and it is recognized that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 indicate that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed. It becomes possible.

  When the character of the character information 38SH31 reaches the upper end of the display area of the image display device 5, it is not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the lower side to the upper side, the effect control CPU 120 causes the character information 38SH31 to be displayed from the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5. Display again to move upward.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-4, it is possible to display the zone telop image 38SH30 for informing that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed and the attention point telop image 38SH40 for teaching the attention point of the pre-reading zone effect Even when the point telop image 38SH40 of interest is superimposed on the zone telop image 38SH30 and displayed, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30.

(Exemplary operation example 5 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20-5 shows another example rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  In this example, by displaying a plurality of same character information "LIVE ZONE" in the zone telop image 38SH30, even if it is difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from one piece of character information, The contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized from a plurality of identical character information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), although two character information 38SH311 and character information 38SH312 with "LIVE ZONE" are displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, the character information 38SH311 has a character string "LIVE" Part of the display area of the image display device 5 is cut off, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the character information 38SH311. Further, in the character information 38SH312, a part of the character string "ZONE" is hidden in the focused point telop image 38SH40, and it is difficult to recognize the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 also from the character information 38SH312. However, some of the recognizable characters of the character string "LIVE" of the character information 38SH311, the recognizable character string of "ZONE" of the character information 38SH311, and the recognizable character string of "LIVE" of the character information 38SH312 And the recognizable part of the character string "ZONE" in the character information 38SH312, it is possible to recognize that the character information "LIVE ZONE" is displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, It becomes possible to recognize that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 indicate that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed.

  Also in this example, by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized more easily. In the example illustrated in FIG. 20-5, the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are moved from the lower side to the upper side from the state illustrated in FIG. As shown in), the recognizable range of the character string "LIVE" of the character information 38SH311 and the recognizable range of the character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH312 are changed. That is, by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312, the range of the recognizable character string changes in each character information, so the character information does not move and the characters that are difficult to recognize or can not be recognized remain unchanged. It becomes easier to recognize that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed, as compared to the case where it is.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-5, it is possible to display the zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed and the attention point telop image 38SH40 teaching the attention point of the pre-reading zone effect Even when the attention point telop image 38SH40 is displayed overlapping the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by displaying a plurality of identical character information on the zone telop image 38SH30.

(Exemplary operation example 6 concerning the characteristic part 38SH)
FIG. 20-6 shows another example rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect based on telop as pre-read advance effect effect based on the effect control command at the time of the start winning combination transmitted from the main substrate 11. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 can output zone music related to the pre-read zone effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs, as zone music, music corresponding to a live effect song or dance to be executed as a pre-reading zone effect.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of pre-reading zone effects having different degrees of jackpot expectation, and can output different types of zone music according to the type of pre-reading zone effects. In the case of such an aspect, the music to be shown in the live effect executed as the pre-reading zone effect may be made different depending on the type of the pre-reading zone effect. According to such an aspect, it is possible for the player who has listened to the zone music to easily recognize the jackpot expectation.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can output, from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, an attention point sound that teaches the attention point of the pre-reading zone effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a voice such as “focus on a member of the center” as a point of interest voice.

  The effect control CPU 120 outputs zone music, for example, on the condition that pre-reading zone effect is being executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an attention point sound, for example, on the condition that the music of the live effect being executed as the pre-reading zone effect transitions to the chorus. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously outputs the zone music and the attention point sound when the live effect music being executed as the pre-reading zone effect shifts to the chorus. In that case, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to recognize or to recognize neither zone music nor attention point voice.

  Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously displays the zone telop image 38SH30 and the attention point telop image 38SH40 when the live effect music being executed as the pre-reading zone effect shifts to the chorus, but the zone The character information 38SH31 of the telop image 38SH30 may be hidden behind the point of interest telop image 38SH40, making recognition difficult or impossible, and making the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 difficult or impossible to recognize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), since the text information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is not hidden in the point of interest telop image 38SH40, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 notify that the prefetch zone effect is being performed. It is visually recognizable that there is something. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes it easy to audibly recognize the attention point sound by, for example, making the sound volume of the attention point sound larger than the volume of the zone music. Here, in order to make the volume of the point of interest sound higher than the volume of the zone music, the method of raising the volume of the point of interest sound to lower the volume of the zone music and decreasing the volume of the zone music There are a method of not raising it and a method of raising the volume of a point of interest sound without reducing the volume of zone music.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), a part of the character string "ZONE" of the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden in the point point telop image 38SH40 of interest and recognition becomes difficult, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 become visual Is difficult to recognize. Therefore, in this example, by making the volume of the zone music louder than the volume of the point of interest voice to make the zone music aurally easy to recognize, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH40 is in the process of performing the pre-reading zone effect To make it possible to recognize that Here, in order to make the volume of the zone music higher than the volume of the point of interest voice, the method of raising the volume of the zone music by lowering the volume of the point of interest voice and decreasing the volume of the point of interest voice There are a method of not raising it and a method of raising the volume of zone music without reducing the volume of the point of interest sound.

  The effect control CPU 120 can specify the position of the character information 38SH31 based on, for example, the effect control pattern and the effect time elapsed since the start of the display of the zone telop image 38SH30. Therefore, when the CPU for effect control 120 displays the focused point telop image 38SH40, the character information 38SH31 focuses on the focused point telop based on the effect control pattern and the rendered time that has elapsed since the display of the zone telop image 38SH30 was started. It can be determined whether the image 38SH40 hides.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-6, it is possible to display the zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that the prefetch zone effect is being performed and the attention point telop image 38SH40 teaching the attention point of the prefetch zone effect Even when the attention point telop image 38SH40 is displayed superimposed on the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 by adjusting the volume of at least one of the volume of the zone music and the sound volume of the attention point voice. Can be recognized.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed, for example, by outputting a sound of “LIVE ZONE” from the speakers 8L and 8R. In such an embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), it is visually recognized that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed. If possible, increase the volume of the point-of-interest voice over the volume of the voice with “LIVE ZONE”, and visually recognize the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 as in the example shown in FIG. 20-6 (B) If it is difficult, the sound volume of "LIVE ZONE" may be made larger than the sound volume of the point of interest sound. At this time, the volume of the zone music may or may not be changed.

(Description 3 about feature 38SH)
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH can display the related display in a mode in which the character display moves. Then, the moving speed of the character display in the first related display is different from the moving speed of the character display in the second related display.

(Exemplary operation example 7 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20-7 and FIG. 20-8 show another rendering operation example relating to the feature portion 38SH. In this example, as a first related display, display of a telop image for notifying that pre-reading zone effect is being performed will be described as an example. Further, in this example, as a second related display, a display of a pseudo continuous telop image in which the number of variable displays resumed by the pseudo continuous effect is notified will be described as an example.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 a telop image notifying of the number of times of the variable display resumed by the pseudo connected effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 and 20-8, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 extending in the left and right directions in the lower area of the display area of the image display device 5. The pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 is an image of an aspect in which the character information 38SH51 of "NEXT × N (N is the number of times of variable display resumed by the pseudo continuous effect)" is displayed. In this example, the fact that the character information 38SH51 of “NEXT × N” of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 is recognizable allows notification of the number of times of variable display resumed by the pseudo continuous effect.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 under the condition that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 on condition that the pseudo continuous rendering is being performed. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously displays the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 when executing the pseudo continuous effect during the execution of the pre-reading zone effect.

  As described above, when the telop images related to different states are simultaneously displayed, the player's attention may be distracted and it may not be possible to cause any telop image to be noticed.

  Therefore, in this example, when displaying telop images relating to different states simultaneously, the moving speed of the character information of the telop image is made different according to which state the degree of attention is high. As an example, based on the technical concept that the faster the moving speed of the text information of the telop image is more noticeable, the easier it is to attract the attention of the player, the moving speed of the text information of the telop image related to the low attention state Increase the moving speed of the text information of the telop image related to the high degree state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-7, the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-series telop image 38SH50 notifying that the number of times of variable display resumed by the pseudo-series effect is one are displayed simultaneously. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot expectation when the number of times of the variable display resumed by the pseudo-series effect is one is lower than the jackpot expectation due to the prefetch zone effect being performed. In that case, it can be said that the pre-read zone effect is an effect with a higher degree of attention than the pseudo-series effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 with the "LIVE ZONE" of the zone telop image 38SH30 faster than the moving speed of the character information 38SH51 with "NEXT x 1" of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50. .

(Exemplary operation example 8 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH)
In the example shown in FIG. 20-8, the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-series telop image 38SH50 notifying that the number of times of variable display resumed by the pseudo-series effect is three are displayed simultaneously. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot expectation when the number of times of the variable display restarted by the pseudo-series effect is three is higher than the jackpot expectation due to the prefetch zone effect being executed. In that case, it can be said that the pseudo-series effect is an effect with a higher degree of attention than the pre-reading zone effect. Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control makes the moving speed of the character information 38SH51 with “NEXT × 3” of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 faster than the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 with “LIVE ZONE” of the zone telop image 38SH30. .

  Note that, for example, based on the technical concept that the slower the moving speed of the character information of the telop image is, the easier it is to read the character string, and the easier it is to attract the attention of the player. The moving speed of the text information of the telop image related to the state of high attention may be slower than the speed.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 20-7 and 20-8, the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 can be displayed by moving character information, and the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be displayed. It is possible to make it easy to pay attention to one of the telop images by making the movement speed of and the movement speed of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH51 different.

(The effect operation example 9 regarding the characteristic part 38SH)
On the other hand, when displaying telop images related to the same state at the same time, it may be better not to intentionally increase the attention to any telop image.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 20-9, when displaying telop images related to the same state at the same time, the moving speed of the character information of the telop image is made about the same. Here, if the moving speed of the character information is about the same, the actual moving speed does not have to be exactly the same, and if the player can give an impression that the moving speed is the same when viewed, it is actually The moving speed of each other may be different. For example, when the character information of a large character and the character information of a small character are moved at exactly the same moving speed, it is smaller because the character information of a smaller character can be seen behind the character information of a large character by an illusion The character information of the character seems to move fast. Therefore, based on such an illusion, whether the moving speeds of the both characters are equal to each other by making the actual moving speed of the character information of the small characters slower than the actual moving speed of the character information of the large characters You may make it look like Also, for example, when moving the character information with blurring and the character information without blurring at the same moving speed, the blurring is included more than the character information of characters without blurring due to illusion Since the character information of the characters is visible behind, it seems that the character information of the characters with blur is moving fast. Therefore, based on such an illusion, both moving speeds are the same, such as by making the moving speed of the character information of the character having the blurring slower than that of the character information of the character not having the blurring. You may make it appear as if it were a degree.

  Note that, for example, in a live presentation where a plurality of characters show a song or dance as shown in FIG. 20-9 as a pre-reading zone effect, any character is positioned at the center of the music at the timing of the chorus. In the case where the big hit expectation of the variable display which is the advance target of the pre-reading zone effect is different depending on whether the pre-reading zone effect of the pre-reading zone effect at the timing of the climax of the music is the pre-reading zone effect at the timing other than the climax of the music It can be said that it is higher than the degree of attention of In view of such a technical idea, the effect control CPU 120 displays the timing of the chorus of the music even when the zone telop image 38SH30 and the attention point telop image 38SH40 related to the same state are simultaneously displayed. The music of the live effect that is being executed as the pre-reading zone effect is more rusty than the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 with the "LIVE ZONE" of the zone telop image 38SH30 displayed on condition that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed The moving speed of the character information 38SH41 with "focus on the member of the center!" Of the attention point telop image 38SH40 displayed as a condition of transitioning to may be made faster.

  Also, for example, in a live presentation where a plurality of characters perform a song or dance as shown in FIG. 20-9 as a pre-reading zone effect, any character is positioned at the center of the music at the timing of the chorus. In the case where the big hit expectation of the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice of the pre-reading zone effect, differs depending on whether the pre-reading zone effect is high, the pre-reading zone effect has high attention when the character with high big hit expectation is located at the center. It can be said that the attention of the pre-reading zone effect is low when the character with low jackpot expectation is located at the center. In view of such a technical idea, even if the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously displays the zone telop image 38SH30 and the attention point telop image 38SH40 related to the same state, a character with a high probability of big hit is located at the center When moving, the moving speed of the character information 38SH41 with "Focus on the member of center!" Of the attention point telop image 38SH40 is made faster than the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 with "LIVE ZONE" of the zone telop image 38SH30. When the character with a low hit probability is located at the center, "LIVE ZONE" of the zone telop image 38SH30 rather than the moving speed of the character information 38SH41 of "Attention to the member of the center!" Of the attention point telop image 38SH40. The moving speed of the character information 38SH31 may be increased.

(Exemplary operation example 10 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH)
Also, the moving speed of the character display of the related display at one timing may be different from the moving speed of the character display of the related display at another timing.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 120 makes the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 different according to the tempo of the music of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-10, live presentation of music that is a late tempo after slow tempo is performed as a pre-reading zone effect, according to the timing at which late tempo after slow tempo ends. The finalized decoration pattern used as the display result of the variable display of a pattern is shown the scene which is made to stop-display. FIG. 20-10 (A) shows a scene at the timing when the uptempo rust is started, and FIG. 20-10 (B) shows a scene one second after the start of the uptempo rust. FIG. 20-10 (C) shows a scene at the timing when the slow tempo start of the trailing is started, and FIG. 20-10 (D) shows a scene one second after the slow tempo after the start of the trailing.

  When such a pre-reading zone effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs a pre-reading zone effect as shown in FIGS. The moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is made faster than the reference speed in response to the tempo of the chorus being the up-tempo. Here, the reference speed is a default speed that does not adjust the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30. For example, music such as prelude to music, A melody, B melody, C melody, etc. It may be applied when it is a period other than post-singing.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 20-10 (C) to (D), shows that the tempo of the post-play is slow tempo during the period of the post-play of the live effect music to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. Depending on the situation, the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is made slower than the reference speed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the finalized decorative symbol, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, in accordance with the timing at which the trailing tempo of slow tempo ends. Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the length of the pre-reading zone effect, the special figure fluctuation time, and the like so that the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed according to the timing of the late tempo subsing. The execution start timing may be determined.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 20-10 (E1), in the case of stopping and displaying the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination, the CPU 120 for effect control executes live effect corresponding to the first of the music as pre-reading zone effect. As the effect, a live effect corresponding to the second of the music may be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-10 (E2), in the case of stopping and displaying the finalized decoration pattern to be a lost combination, the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading zone effect with the finalized display of the finalized decoration pattern. You should do it.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 completes the slow tempo intercession after the music No. 1 rust, and after the music No. 2 A melody and head rust are started, the display result of the variable symbol display of the decorative pattern becomes If the determined decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, and the display result is a "big hit", a live effect corresponding to the second of the music may be performed seamlessly as a big hit medium effect. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to greatly improve the expectation for the display result to be a "big hit" before the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20-10, the pre-reading zone effect is produced by changing the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 according to the tempo of the music of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. Can improve the interest in

  Further, when the CPU 120 for effect control executes other effects along with the display of the telop, the aspect changes even if the aspect of the aspect changes according to the change of the aspect of the other effects, and the aspect of the other effects changes It is possible to display with no telop.

  As one example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the moving speed of the character information according to the change of the music tempo, the telop image of which the moving speed of the character information does not change even when the music tempo changes. Can be displayed. In addition, when the CPU for effect control 120 displays a telop of a mode in which the display is updated to character information different from the character information being displayed instead of moving the character information, the tempo of the music changes. Thus, it is possible to display a telop image in which the update timing of the text information changes and a telop image in which the update timing of the text information does not change even if the tempo of the music changes.

  As another example, when the effect control CPU executes reach effect and derives the finalized decorative symbol, for example, it changes the effect speed of reach effect such as slowing down the playback speed of the moving image reproduced by reach effect By making it possible, it is possible to execute a scruffy effect that has a sense of anticipation that a definite decoration pattern to be a big hit combination is derived. In executing the reach effect of such an aspect, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the slowing of the moving image reproduction speed in the turning effect as the telop whose aspect changes according to the change of the other effect aspect. It is possible to display a telop image in which the moving speed of the text information is slow.

  In addition, as another example, the CPU for effect control 120, as a telop whose aspect changes according to the change of the aspect of the other effect, for example, according to the audience of the music live, the character information of “HEY!” The display pops up, and the character information display "I hit the button continuously!" According to the gunshot sound of the battlefield. The display of the character information shakes according to the batting sound of the fighting. It is possible to display a telop whose mode changes in accordance with the sound effects in other effects such as a telop whose display is distorted.

  Further, as another example, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the spotlight hitting a character image displayed in a live effect, for example, as a telop whose mode changes in accordance with a change in the mode of another effect. "That's a member of the center!" And every time a building is destroyed in a display where the display of the character information in the center lights up and the giant is destroying the building, "Do you want to become a giant?" The character information display is broken, and the display of the character information of "Gogogogo ... ..." is expanded or shrunk or shaken every time the destroyed building collapses in the effect display where the giant destroys the building. It is possible to display a telop whose mode changes in accordance with the movement of the display in the effect.

(Description 4 about feature 38SH)
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH can display the related display in different modes before and after the specific effect is displayed during the display of the related display. Then, even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Exemplary operation example 11 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20A shows another example of the effect operation regarding the feature portion 38SH. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10, for example, on condition that the big hit and middle effect is being executed. Also, for example, when it is detected that the game ball is launched toward the left game area despite being in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right strike instruction image 38SH20 .

  FIG. 20A is a display example when it is detected that a game ball is launched toward the right play area in the big hit gaming state. In the big hit game state, when it is detected that the game ball is fired toward the right play area, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10, but does not display the right hitting instruction image 38SH20. As described above, when the right hitting notification image 38SH20 is not displayed when the big hit telop image 38SH10 is displayed, the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized.

  FIG. 20-11 (B) is a display example when it is detected that the gaming ball is fired toward the left playing area immediately after the situation shown in FIG. 20-11 (A). When it is detected that the game ball is launched toward the left game area, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 on the big hit telop image 38SH10. As described above, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed superimposed on the big hit telop image 38SH10, it becomes difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 right-hits character information that is difficult to visually recognize or invisible due to being hidden in the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 according to the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 being superimposed and displayed on the big hit telop image 38SH10. It is displayed at a position not hidden by the instruction image 38SH20. In the example shown in FIG. 20-11 (B), a big hit telop image 38SH10 is displayed with a balloon image 38SH60 indicating character information of "LIVE" which is hidden behind the right hit instruction image 38SH20 and is difficult to view. Note that the position at which the balloon image 38SH60 is displayed may be a position away from the big hit telop image 38SH10 as long as the position does not hide the right-handed command image 38SH20.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20-11, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed overlapping while the big-hit telop image 38SH10 is displayed, “LIVE” that is hidden behind the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and difficult to be recognized. The content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by displaying the big hit telop image 38SH10 in which the balloon image 38SH60 indicating the character information of the above is placed at a position not hidden by the right hitting instruction image 38SH20.

(Exemplary operation example 12 regarding the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20-12 (A) is a display example when it is detected that the gaming ball is fired toward the right playing area in the big hit gaming state. In the big hit game state, when it is detected that the game ball is fired toward the right play area, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10A, but does not display the right hitting instruction image 38SH20. As described above, when the right hitting notification image 38SH20 is not displayed while the big hit telop image 38SH10A is displayed, the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10A can be recognized.

  FIG. 20-12 (B) is a display example when it is detected that the gaming ball is fired toward the left playing area immediately after the situation shown in FIG. 20-12 (A). When it is detected that the game ball is launched toward the left game area, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 on the big hit telop image 38SH10A. As described above, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed superimposed on the big hit telop image 38SH10A, it becomes difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10A. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of big hit telop images according to the right hit instruction image 38SH20 being superimposed and displayed on the big hit telop image 38SH10A. In the example shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), the big hit telop image 38SH10B of the same content is displayed in addition to the big hit telop image 38SH10A on which the right hitting indication image 38SH20 overlaps.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20-12, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20B is displayed overlapping while the big hit telop image 38SH10A is displayed, the big hit telop image 38SH10B having the same content as the big hit telop image 38SH10A is newly displayed. By doing this, the contents of the big hit telop image can be recognized.

  In the case of displaying a plurality of telop images, the display mode of each telop image may be made different.

(Example operation of rendering operation 13 related to the characteristic portion 38SH)
In the example shown in FIG. 20-13, when the big hit telop image 38SH10A and the big hit telop image 38SH10B are displayed, the moving direction of the character information of each big hit telop image is made different.

(Example operation of effect on the feature 38SH 14)
In the example shown in FIG. 20-14, when the big hit telop image 38SH10C, the big hit telop image 38SH10D, and the big hit telop image 38SH10E are displayed, the length of each big hit telop image and the direction in which each big hit telop image is different are different. I'm sorry.

(Example operation of the effect on the characteristic portion 38SH 15)
In the example shown in FIG. 20-15, when the big hit telop image 38SH10F and the big hit telop image 38SH10G are displayed, the thickness of each big hit telop image and the size of the character information of each big hit telop image are made different.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-13 to 20-15, when displaying a plurality of telop images, the presentation effect is enhanced by making the display modes of the telop images different, and the presentation becomes monotonous. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the case of applying such a configuration to display a telop image related to the notice effect, the display mode when displaying a plurality of telop images may differ depending on the degree of expectation of the big hit of the notice effect. Good. For example, if the display mode at the time of displaying a plurality of telop images related to the preview effect is made more flashy as the jackpot expectation level is higher, the display mode at the time of displaying a plurality of telop images Accordingly, it is possible to suggest the big hit expectation degree of the notice effect, and not only it is possible to improve the interest but also to significantly improve the attention to the telop image.

  Also, the jackpot expectation may be made different depending on the number of telops displayed simultaneously, the combination of types of telops displayed simultaneously, or the like.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs, as a result of the effect, either a success notification for notifying an advantageous result for the player or a failure notification for not notifying an advantageous result for the player, in the prior effect of the common aspect. It is possible to execute a specific effect to be performed later. The effect control CPU 120 can display a plurality of telops even during execution of such a specific effect. In the case of such an aspect, the degree of expectation of success notification being executed as a result of the specific effect may be varied according to the number of telops displayed simultaneously, the combination of types of telops displayed simultaneously, or the like.

  The effect control CPU 120 can also display a plurality of telops of different types in a mode as shown in FIGS. 20-13 to 20-15.

  The effect control CPU 120 can also display a plurality of telops having different moving speeds and updating speeds of character information in a mode as shown in FIGS. 20-13 to 20-15.

(Additional note on feature 38SH)
(1) The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.), comprising display means (for example the image display device 5 etc.) Can display a related display (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 or the like notifying that a big hit is being performed during a big hit) and a specific display (for example, a right hitting instruction image 38SH20 or the like) The contents of the related display can be recognized even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display (for example, even when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is superimposed on the telop image 38SH10, the telop image 38SH10 Moving the character information 38SH11 makes it possible to recognize the contents of the telop image 38SH10, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the display means is a second specific display different from the related display as a specific display displayed superimposed on a first related display (for example, zone telop image 38SH30 etc.) The related display (for example, the attention point telop image 38SH40 etc.) may be displayable.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

  (3) In the gaming machine according to the above (2), the display means can display the related display by moving the character display (for example, character information 38SH31, character information 38SH51, etc.), and in the first related display The moving speed of the character display may be different from the moving speed of the character display in the second related display (for example, the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the moving speed of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50) Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the display means can display the related display in different modes before and after the specific effect is displayed during the display of the related display. (For example, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed overlapping while the big-hit telop image 38SH10 is displayed, a balloon image showing character information of “LIVE” that is hidden behind the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and is difficult to view A big hit telop image 38SH10 in which 38SH60 is attached to a position not hidden by the right strike instruction image 38SH20, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(Description 1 about the feature portion 38SH and the feature portion 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 38SH and the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the feature portion 38SH and the feature portion 31AK is a gaming machine which can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the display means and the advantageous state are controlled. And a title notification unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The title notification means can display the title corresponding to the suggestion effect as a related display related to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggestion effect. The display means can display such a related display and a specific display. Then, even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Description of Feature 38SH and Feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 38SH and the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the feature portion 38SH and the feature portion 31AK is a gaming machine which can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the display means and the advantageous state are controlled. And a title notification unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The title notification means can display, as a specific display, a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect. The display means can display such a specific display and a related display related to the predetermined state. Then, even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Description of Feature 38SH (39SH) 1)
Next, the features 38SH (39SH) of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characterizing portion 38SH (39SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and comprises display means and an operable movable body. The display means can display related display related to a predetermined state in a predetermined display area. The movable body is operable at an operating position overlapping at least a predetermined display area. Then, even when the movable body is in the operating position during the display of the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Example 1 of the rendering operation concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-16 shows an example of the rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, as a related display related to a predetermined state, display of a telop image for notifying that pre-reading zone effect is being performed will be described as an example.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute the movable body effect for operating the movable body 32 on the front surface of the image display device 5 during the execution of the prefetch zone effect. When the movable body effect is not performed, the movable body 32 operating in such a movable body effect only needs to be retracted to the initial position not covered by the front surface of the image display device 5. In this example, a movable body effect that operates the movable body 32 imitating a stick light used by a spectator in a music live will be described as the movable body effect performed during execution of the prefetch zone effect. In this example, when the movable body 32 simulating a stick light is swung left and right on the front surface of the image display device 5, a part of images etc. displayed in the display area below the image display device 5 can be moved. It hides in the body 32 and becomes invisible or invisible.

  Alternatively, the movable body 32 may be provided with LEDs capable of emitting light of a plurality of colors, and the LED may emit light of a predetermined color when the movable body 32 is operated. Further, the operation speed of the movable body 32 may be made different in accordance with the tempo of the music of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the vertical direction in the left area of the display area of the image display device 5, under the condition that pre-reading zone effect is being executed. Further, the CPU for effect control 120 determines, for example, whether or not the movable object effect is to be executed, in accordance with the big hit expectation degree of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed.

  Further, for example, the mode of the movable body effect may be made different according to the degree of expectation of the big hit of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. For example, the light emission color of the LED incorporated in the movable body 32 is made different according to the degree of expectation of the big hit of the live effect being executed as the pre-reading zone effect.

  Also, for example, when the movable body effect is performed before the chorus of the live effect music to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect, the movable body according to which character is positioned at the center in the chorus of the music You may make the aspect of presentation different. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-16, two movable bodies 32 are set as one set, and movable body effects are performed by a total of four movable bodies 32 in a total of two sets, but any character is a character of the music. Depending on whether it is located at the center, the combinations of emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set are made different. In that case, the combination of the emission colors of the two movable bodies 32 in the set is, for example, the emission colors of the two movable bodies 32 in the set if the favorite color of the character A is “white”. If the combination is "white" and "white", and the favorite color of the character A is "red" and "green", the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set is "red" and "red" It is a combination of colors according to the character settings of each character, such as green. With such a configuration, the color of the movable body 32 in the movable body effect causes any character to be positioned at the center of the music in the chorus of the music of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. I can suggest what to do.

  In that case, as shown in FIG. 20-16, the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the movable body 32 on the left side may be different from the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the movable body 32 on the right side. With such a configuration, the color of the movable body 32 in the movable body effect causes any character to be positioned at the center of the music in the chorus of the music of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. It is possible to suggest the possibility of being either of the two characters, and it is possible to improve interest.

  Further, for example, the mode of the movable body effect may be made different according to the music of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. For example, the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 as a set is made different according to the music of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. In that case, the combination of the emission colors of the two movable bodies 32 in the set is, for example, the combination of the emission colors of the two movable bodies 32 in the set if the image color of the music A is "purple". If the image color of song B is "green" and "white", then the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set is "green" and "white". And the combination of colors according to the image of each song. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when live effects by a specific music having an image color are performed as the pre-reading zone effects.

  In that case, the movable body 32 moves to the front of the display area on the left side where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, so that the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is hidden by the movable body 32 and difficult or unrecognizable As a result, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may be difficult to recognize or unrecognizable. In the example shown in FIG. 20-16 (A), part of the character string "ZONE" in the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden behind the movable body 32, making it difficult to recognize and making it difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30. It has become. As described above, when it is difficult or impossible to recognize part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being performed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize things.

  Therefore, in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example shown in FIG. 20-16, as shown in FIG. 20-16 (B), the character information 38SH 31 of the zone telop image 38SH 30 is moved from the lower side to the upper side from the state shown in FIG. The character string "LIVE ZONE" moves to a position where it is not hidden by the movable body 32 and can be recognized, and notifies that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is in execution of the pre-reading zone effect It becomes recognizable.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 20-16, the zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that the prefetch zone effect is being performed can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed. Also by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

  The effect control CPU 120 also has an operation cycle of the movable body 32 repeating a specific operation, and a cycle in which a specific part of the character information is displayed at a position hidden by the movable body 32 as the text information of the telop moves. Control may be performed to adjust at least one of the operating speed of the movable body 32 and the moving speed of the text information of the telop so as not to coincide with each other. According to such control, it is possible to prevent only the same part of the character information from being hidden behind the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to visually recognize or become invisible.

(Example operation 2 of the feature section 38SH (39SH))
FIGS. 20-17 show other example rendering operations relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  In this example, by displaying a plurality of same character information "LIVE ZONE" in the zone telop image 38SH30, even if it is difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from one piece of character information, The contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized from a plurality of identical character information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), although two character information 38SH311 and character information 38SH312 with "LIVE ZONE" are displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, the character information 38SH311 has the character string "LIVE" The image does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and is cut out, making it difficult to recognize the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the character information 38SH311. In the character information 38SH312, part of the character string "ZONE" is hidden by the movable body 32, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 also from the character information 38SH312. However, a recognizable character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH311, a recognizable character string "LIVE" of the character information 38SH312, and some recognizable characters of the character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH312 According to the above, it is possible to recognize that the character information "LIVE ZONE" is displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, and to notify that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are under execution of the pre-reading zone effect Can be recognized.

  Also in this example, by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized more easily. In the example shown in FIG. 20-17, the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are moved from the lower side to the upper side from the state shown in FIG. As shown in), the recognizable range of the character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH311 and the recognizable range of the character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH312 are changed. That is, by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312, the range of the recognizable character string changes in each character information, so the character information does not move and the characters that are difficult to recognize or can not be recognized remain unchanged. It becomes easier to recognize that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed, as compared with a case.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-17, the zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that the prefetch zone effect is being performed can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed. Also, by displaying a plurality of identical character information in the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

(Example 3 of the rendering operation regarding the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIGS. 20-18 show another example of rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can output, from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, sound corresponding to the movable body corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 during the execution of the movable body effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound that simulates the cheering of the audience, such as “Wa”, as the movable body corresponding sound.

  The effect control CPU 120 outputs zone music, for example, on the condition that pre-reading zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a movable object corresponding voice on condition that the movable object effect is being executed. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously outputs the zone music and the movable object corresponding voice when executing the movable object effect during execution of the pre-reading zone effect. In that case, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to recognize or can not recognize any of the zone music and the movable body corresponding voice.

  Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed when performing the movable body effect during execution of the prefetch zone effect, but the characters of the zone telop image 38SH30 The information 38SH31 may be hidden by the movable body 32 to make recognition difficult or impossible, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may become difficult to recognize or unrecognizable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), since the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is not hidden by the movable body 32, it is informed that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are under execution of the pre-reading zone effect Can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes the sound corresponding to the movable body easy to recognize aurally by making the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body louder than the volume of the zone music. Here, in order to make the volume of the movable body corresponding voice larger than the volume of the zone music, the method of raising the volume of the movable body corresponding voice by lowering the volume of the zone music and lowering the volume of the zone music There are a method of not raising the volume of and a method of raising the volume of the movable body corresponding voice without lowering the volume of the zone music.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-18 (B), a part of the character string "ZONE" of the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden behind the movable body 32 and it becomes difficult to recognize, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is visually It is difficult to recognize. Therefore, in this example, by making the volume of the zone music louder than the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body, etc., and making the zone music aurally easy to recognize, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 execute the pre-reading zone effect It is possible to recognize that it is to inform that it is medium. Here, in order to make the volume of the zone music higher than the volume of the movable body corresponding voice, the method of raising the volume of the zone music by lowering the volume of the movable body corresponding voice and decreasing the volume of the movable body corresponding voice There are a method of not raising the volume of and a method of raising the volume of zone music without lowering the volume of the movable body corresponding voice.

  The effect control CPU 120 can specify the position of the character information 38SH31 based on, for example, the effect control pattern and the effect time elapsed since the start of the display of the zone telop image 38SH30. Therefore, when executing the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 hides the character information 38SH31 in the movable body 32 based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the start of the display of the zone telop image 38SH30. Can be determined.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-18, the zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that the prefetch zone effect is being performed can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed. Also, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by adjusting the volume of at least one of the volume of the zone music and the volume of the movable body corresponding voice.

(Description 2 about feature 38SH (39SH))
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic part 38SH (39SH) can display the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the movable body. Then, even when the correspondence display is superimposed on the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Example operation of effect on the feature 38SH (39SH) 4)
FIG. 20-19 shows another example of rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 on the image display device 52 while the movable body effect is being executed. In this example, when the movable body 32 imitating a stick light is on the front of the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image 38 SHE imitating the light of the stick light as a corresponding display of the movable body 32. Display around. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect image 38 SHE in accordance with the operation of the movable body 32 so that light is seen around the movable body 32 that simulates a stick light.

  When the LED is built in the movable body 32 to emit light, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image 38SHE of the same color as the emission color of the LED of the movable body 32.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the vertical direction in the left area of the display area of the image display device 5, under the condition that pre-reading zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image 38SHE, for example, on the condition that the movable object effect is being executed. Therefore, when the movable body effect is executed during execution of the pre-reading zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image 38SHE while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed.

  In that case, the movable body 32 moves to the front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, whereby the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed around the movable body 32. Hidden in 38SHE, it becomes difficult to recognize or unrecognizable, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 sometimes become difficult to recognize or unrecognizable. In the example shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), part of the character string "ZONE" in the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden in the effect image 38SHE, making it difficult to recognize, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 being difficult to recognize. It has become. As described above, when it is difficult or impossible to recognize part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being performed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize things.

  Therefore, in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example shown in FIG. 20-19, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is moved from the lower side to the upper side from the state shown in FIG. 20-19 (A). The character string "LIVE ZONE" is moved to a position where it is not hidden by the effect image 38SHE and can be recognized, and it is informed that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are under execution of the pre-reading zone effect. It becomes recognizable.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 20-19, the zone telop image can be displayed even when the effect image 38SHE corresponding to the movement of the movable body 32 can be displayed and the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed superimposed on the zone. By moving the character information 38SH31 of 38SH30, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

(Exemplary operation example 5 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-20 shows another example of the rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  In this example, by displaying a plurality of same character information "LIVE ZONE" in the zone telop image 38SH30, even if it is difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from one piece of character information, The contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized from a plurality of identical character information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), although two character information 38SH311 and character information 38SH312 with "LIVE ZONE" are displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, the character information 38SH311 has the character string "LIVE" The image does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and is cut out, making it difficult to recognize the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the character information 38SH311. In the character information 38SH312, a part of the character string "ZONE" is hidden in the effect image 38SHE, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 also from the character information 38SH312. However, a recognizable character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH311, a recognizable character string "LIVE" of the character information 38SH312, and some recognizable characters of the character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH312 According to the above, it is possible to recognize that the character information "LIVE ZONE" is displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, and to notify that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are under execution of the pre-reading zone effect Can be recognized.

  Also in this example, by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized more easily. In the example illustrated in FIG. 20-20, the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are moved from the lower side to the upper side from the state illustrated in FIG. As shown in), the recognizable range of the character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH311 and the recognizable range of the character string "ZONE" of the character information 38SH312 are changed. That is, by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312, the range of the recognizable character string changes in each character information, so the character information does not move and the characters that are difficult to recognize or can not be recognized remain unchanged. It becomes easier to recognize that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed, as compared with a case.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20-20, the effect image 38SHE corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 can be displayed, and the zone telop image can be displayed even when the effect image 38SHE is displayed superimposed on the zone telop image 38SH30. The contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by displaying a plurality of identical character information on the 38SH30.

(Exemplary operation example 6 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIGS. 20-21 shows the example of another presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 outputs zone music, for example, on the condition that pre-reading zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a movable object corresponding voice on condition that the movable object effect is being executed. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously outputs the zone music and the movable object corresponding voice when executing the movable object effect during execution of the pre-reading zone effect. In that case, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to recognize or can not recognize any of the zone music and the movable body corresponding voice.

  Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image 38SHE while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed when the movable object effect is executed during execution of the prefetch zone effect, but the characters of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed. The information 38SH31 may be hidden behind the effect image 38SHE to make recognition difficult or impossible, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 may become difficult to recognize or unrecognizable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-21 (A), since the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is not hidden in the effect image 38SHE, it is informed that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are under execution of the pre-reading zone effect Can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes the sound corresponding to the movable body easy to recognize aurally by making the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body louder than the volume of the zone music. Here, in order to make the volume of the movable body corresponding voice larger than the volume of the zone music, the method of raising the volume of the movable body corresponding voice by lowering the volume of the zone music and lowering the volume of the zone music There are a method of not raising the volume of and a method of raising the volume of the movable body corresponding voice without lowering the volume of the zone music.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-21 (B), a part of the character string "ZONE" of the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden in the effect image 38SHE and the recognition becomes difficult, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is visually It is difficult to recognize. Therefore, in this example, by making the volume of the zone music louder than the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body, etc., and making the zone music aurally easy to recognize, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 execute the pre-reading zone effect It is possible to recognize that it is to inform that it is medium. Here, in order to make the volume of the zone music higher than the volume of the movable body corresponding voice, the method of raising the volume of the zone music by lowering the volume of the movable body corresponding voice and decreasing the volume of the movable body corresponding voice There are a method of not raising the volume of and a method of raising the volume of zone music without lowering the volume of the movable body corresponding voice.

  The effect control CPU 120 can specify the position of the character information 38SH31 based on, for example, the effect control pattern and the effect time elapsed since the start of the display of the zone telop image 38SH30. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image 38SHE, the character information 38SH31 is hidden in the effect image 38SHE based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the start of the display of the zone telop image 38SH30. Can be determined.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 20-21, the effect image 38SHE corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 can be displayed, and even when the effect image 38SHE is superimposed and displayed on the zone telop image 38SH30 The content of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by adjusting the volume of at least one of the volume and the volume of the movable body corresponding voice.

(Description about feature 38SH (39SH) 3)
In addition, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH), as the related display, may be a first related effect which may be difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body and a second related effect which is not visually difficult to visually Can be displayed.

(Exemplary operation example 7 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIGS. 20-22 show another example of rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display, as related displays related to the same state, a first related effect that may be difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the movable body and a second related effect that does not become difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the movable body. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-22, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30A that may be difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body 32 as the first related display, and the movable body 32 as the second related display. The zone telop image 38SH30B which does not become difficult to view due to the operation of is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30A and the zone telop image 38SH30B, for example, on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-22 (A), both the zone telop image 38SH30A and the zone telop image 38SH30B are visible. Therefore, it can be recognized that the content of the zone telop image is to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed.

  Further, the CPU for effect control 120 determines, for example, whether or not the movable object effect is to be executed, in accordance with the big hit expectation degree of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 while the zone telop image 38SH30A and the zone telop image 38SH30B are displayed.

  In that case, when the movable body 32 appears on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30A displayed in the lower area in the display area of the image display device 5, the character information 38SH31A of the zone telop image 38SH30A is hidden by the movable body 32 and difficult to recognize Alternatively, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30A may be unrecognizable or unrecognizable. In the example shown in FIG. 20-22 (B), part of the character string "ZONE" in the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden behind the movable body 32, making it difficult to recognize and making it difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30A. It has become. As described above, when part or all of the character information 38SH31A of the zone telop image 38SH30A is difficult or unrecognizable, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30A notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being performed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize things. On the other hand, even in such a situation, the movable body 32 does not overlap the zone telop image 38SH30B displayed in the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5, so the contents of the zone telop image from the zone telop image 38SH30 It can be recognized that it is to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being performed.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-22, it is possible to display the zone telop image 38SH30A which may be difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body 32, and the zone telop image 38SH30B which is not difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body 32, Even when the movable body 32 overlaps the zone telop image 38SH30A and recognition is difficult or impossible, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30B can be recognized because the movable body 32 does not overlap the zone telop image 38SH30B.

(Exemplary operation example 8 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-23 shows another example of the rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display, as related displays related to different states, a first related display that may be difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body 32 and a second related visual that does not become difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body 32 is there. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-23, the effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 that may be difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body 32 as a first related display, and displays the movable body 32 as a second related display. The pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 which does not become difficult to view due to the operation of is displayed.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 under the condition that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50, for example, on the condition that the pseudo continuous effect is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), both the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 can be viewed. Therefore, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, and the content of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 is to notify the number of times of variable display resumed by the pseudo continuous effect. It is possible to recognize that.

  Further, the CPU for effect control 120 determines, for example, whether or not the movable object effect is to be executed, in accordance with the big hit expectation degree of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect. Therefore, when it is determined to execute the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 may operate the movable body 32 during display of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50.

  In that case, when the movable body 32 appears on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30 displayed in the right area in the display area of the image display device 5, the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is hidden by the movable body 32 and recognized It may be difficult or unrecognizable, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may become difficult to recognize or unrecognizable. In the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (B), part of the character string "ZONE" in the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden behind the movable body 32, making it difficult to recognize and making it difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30. It has become. As described above, when it is difficult or impossible to recognize part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being performed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize things. On the other hand, even in such a situation, since the movable body 32 does not overlap the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 displayed in the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5, the content of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 is pseudo It is possible to recognize that it is to notify the number of variable display resumed by the series effect.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-23, it is possible to display the zone telop image 38SH30 which may be difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body 32, and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 which is not visually difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body 32. Even when the movable body 32 overlaps the zone telop image 38SH30 and the recognition is difficult or impossible, the movable body 32 does not overlap the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50, so that the contents of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 can be recognized. is there.

(The effect operation example 9 about the characteristic part 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-24 shows another example of the rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), both of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 are visible. Therefore, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, and the content of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 is to notify the number of times of variable display resumed by the pseudo continuous effect. It is possible to recognize that.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), a zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the vertical direction is displayed in the right area of the display area of the image display device 5, and a pseudo-series telop extending in the horizontal direction in the lower area. When the image 38SH50 is displayed, when the movable body 32 appears, both the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 are hidden by the movable body 32 and difficult to recognize or recognize. As a result, it may be difficult or impossible to recognize any of the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-24 (B), part of the character string "ZONE" in the character string "LIVE ZONE" is hidden behind the movable body 32, making it difficult to recognize and making it difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30. It has become. As described above, when it is difficult or impossible to recognize part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being performed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize things.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B), the effect control CPU 120 hides the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 in response to the appearance of the movable body 32, and the contents of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50. In order to display the pseudo linked notification image 38SH70 for reporting the number of variable displays resumed due to the simulated linked effects, according to the pseudo linked notification image 38SH70, the same as the content of the pseudo linked telop image 38SH50 which is not displayed The contents can be recognized.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-24, the zone telop image 38SH30 that may be difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the movable body 32 and the occurrence of the movable body 32 become non-display, and as a result, the operation of the movable body 32 Displaying the pseudo continuous notification image 38SH50 which can display the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 which does not become difficult to visually recognize and which is the content of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 and which notifies the number of variable display resumed by the pseudo continuous rendering Therefore, the same contents as the contents of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 which has become non-display can be recognized.

(Description about feature 38SH (39SH) 4)
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) can display the related display in different modes before and after the movable body moves to the operating position while the related display is being performed.

(Exemplary operation example 10 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-25 shows another example of rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 in the lower area of the display area of the image display device 5, for example, under the condition that pre-reading zone effect is being executed. Further, the CPU for effect control 120 determines, for example, whether or not to execute the movable body effect according to the big hit expectation degree of the live effect to be executed as the pre-reading zone effect, and when executing the movable body effect, the zone telop The movable body 32 is operated while the image 38SH30 is displayed.

  FIG. 20-25 (A) is a display example when the movable body effect is not started during execution of the prefetch zone effect. When the movable body effect is not started during execution of the pre-reading zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 and does not operate the movable body 32. As described above, when the movable body 32 does not operate while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

  FIG. 20-25 (B) is an example of a display at the time of starting movable body presentation immediately after the condition shown to FIG. 20-25 (A). The effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 in front of the zone telop image 38SH30 displayed in the lower area of the display area of the image display device 5 when executing movable body effect. Thus, when the movable body 32 is operated on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30, it becomes difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 causes the movable body 32 to make the movable body 32 character information 38SH31 which is hidden behind the movable body 32 and difficult to be recognized visually or not as the movable body 32 is operated on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30. Display in a non-hidden position. In the example shown in FIG. 20-25 (B), a zone telop image 38SH30 to which a mini character image 38SH80 for notifying character information 38SH31 of "LIVE ZONE" which is hidden behind the movable body 32 and difficult to be recognized is displayed. The position where the mini character image 38SH80 is displayed may be separated from the zone telop image 38SH30 as long as the position does not hide the movable body 32.

As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-25, when the movable body 32 is operated on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30, the character information 38SH31 with "LIVE ZONE" which is hidden behind the movable body 32 and is difficult to view is notified The contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 with the mini character image 38SH80.
(Exemplary operation example 11 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20: (A) is a display example in case the movable body presentation is not started during execution of prefetch zone presentation. When the movable body effect is not started during the execution of the pre-reading zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30A and does not operate the movable body 32. As described above, when the movable body 32 does not operate while the zone telop image 38SH30A is displayed, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30A can be recognized.

  FIG. 20: (B) is a display example at the time of starting movable body presentation immediately after the condition shown to FIG. 20 (A). The effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30A displayed in the lower area of the display area of the image display device 5 when executing the movable body effect. Thus, when the movable body 32 is operated on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30A, it becomes difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30A. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of zone telop images according to the operation of the movable body 32 on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30A. In the example shown in FIG. 20-26 (B), in addition to the zone telop image 38SH30A on which the movable body 32 overlaps, the zone telop image 38SH30B of the same content is displayed.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-26, when the movable body 32 is operated on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30A, the zone telop image 38SH30B having the same content as the zone telop image 38SH30A is newly displayed to display the zone. The contents of the telop image can be recognized.

(Additional note on the features 38SH (39SH))
(1) The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.), which operates with display means (eg the image display device 5 etc.) A movable body (e.g., movable body 32 etc.), and the display means can display related display related to a predetermined state in a predetermined display area (e.g., the pre-reading zone effect is being executed) The zone telop image 38SH30 for informing the display in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 etc.), the movable body is operable at an operation position overlapping at least the predetermined display area (Eg, the movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH 30 is displayed, etc.), while the related display is displayed. The content of the related display can be recognized even when the moving object is in the operating position (for example, even when the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area during display of the zone telop image 38SH30, zone telop Moving the character information 38SH31 of the image 38SH30 makes it possible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30)

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the display means can display a corresponding display (for example, the effect image 38 SHE etc.) corresponding to the operation of the movable body, and displays the corresponding display superimposed on the related display. Also in the case where the contents of the related display can be recognized (for example, even when the effect image 38SHE is superimposed on the zone telop image 38SH30, the zone is moved by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30). The contents of the telop image 38SH30 can be recognized, etc.)

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  (3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the display means, as a related display, may be a first related effect (for example, zone telop image 38SH30A etc.) that may be difficult to visually recognize by the operation of the movable body. It is possible to display a second related effect (for example, zone telop image 38SH30B, etc.) that does not become difficult to view due to the operation of the movable body.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the display means displays the related display in different modes before and after the movable body moves to the operating position during execution of the related display. Can be displayed (for example, when operating the movable body 32 on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30, the mini character image 38SH80 reporting the character information 38SH31 with "LIVE ZONE" hidden in the movable body 32 and difficult to be recognized) And displaying the zone telop image 38SH30).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

(Description of the features 38SH (39SH) and the features 31AK)
Next, the features 38SH (39SH) and the features 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the features 38SH (39SH) and the feature 31AK is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and the display means, the operable movable body, and the advantageous state are controlled. And a title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect. The title notification means can display a title corresponding to the suggested effect in a predetermined display area as a related display related to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect. The movable body is operable at an operating position overlapping at least a predetermined display area. Then, even when the movable body is in the operating position during the display of the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Description of Feature 38SH (40SH) 1)
Next, the features 38SH (40SH) of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and comprises a first display means and a second display means, and the first display means and the second display means The related display related to the predetermined state can be displayed across.

  FIGS. 20-27 show an example of the rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (40SH).

(Exemplary operation example 1 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (A) includes the image display device 5 as the first display means and the sub image display device 38SH5A as the second display means.

  The sub-image display device 38SH5A is provided, for example, adjacent to the right side of the image display device 5. The sub image display device 38SH5A is configured of, for example, an LCD, an organic EL, or the like, and displays various effect images. The sub image display device 38SH5A may be configured of a projector and a screen. The display control unit 123 causes the sub image display device 38SH5A to display the effect image by supplying the sub image display device 38SH5A with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. .

  The effect control CPU 120 extends across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A from the right end in the display region of the sub image display device 38SH5A to the left end in the display region of the image display device 5 zone telop image 38SH30 Display

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to move from the right end to the left side in the display area of the sub image display device 38SH5A. When the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A, they are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the sub image display device 38SH5A as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right side to the left side in the sub image display device 38SH5A, the effect control CPU 120 controls the sub image display device The characters of the character information 38SH31 which are no longer displayed are displayed on the 38SH 5A so as to be moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left. Then, when the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, the characters are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the image display device 5 as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right to the left on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to The character of the character information 38SH31 which is not displayed is displayed again so as to move it from the right end of the display area of the sub image display device 38SH5A to the left.

  The sub image display device 38SH5A may not always be provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 5. For example, the sub-image display device 38SH5A is provided at a position different from the right side of the image display device 5, and moves to align with the right side of the image display device 5 in response to performing a predetermined effect such as pre-reading zone effect It may be one.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-27 (A), the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A are provided, and the pre-reading zone effect is provided across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A. By displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 for notifying that it is being executed, it is possible to perform suitable display by the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A.

(Exemplary operation example 2 for the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (B) includes the image display device 5 as the first display means and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B as the second display means.

  The dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B is provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 5, for example. The dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B is a dot matrix type display in which LEDs are arranged in a two-dimensional array, and for example, cathodes are connected in columns and anodes are connected in rows. The effect control CPU 120 individually illuminates the individual LEDs by designating the row and the column and supplying the current, and performs the designation of the column and the row by the raster scan method, thereby the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B. To display various effect images. The display control unit 123 supplies the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the CPU 120 for effect control to the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B. Display.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the brightness of the individual dots by changing the number of pulses for each LED. In addition, if RGB color LEDs are used for the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B, a full color display can be realized. Also, if an OLED is employed instead of the LED, dots smaller than the LED can be formed.

  The effect control CPU 120 extends across the image display device 5 and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B from the right end in the display area of the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B to the left end in the display area of the image display device 5 Display image 38SH30.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to move from the right end to the left side in the display area of the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B. When the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B, they are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right side to the left side by the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B, the effect control CPU 120 performs the dot matrix The character of the character information 38SH31 which is not displayed is displayed on the LED display device 38SH5B so as to move from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left side. Then, when the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, the characters are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the image display device 5 as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right to the left on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to The characters of the character information 38SH31 which are not displayed are displayed again so as to move from the right end to the left side of the display area of the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B.

The dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B may not always be provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 5. For example, the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B is provided at a position different from the right side of the image display device 5, and moves to align with the right side of the image display device 5 in response to performing a predetermined effect such as pre-reading zone effect It may be
As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-27 (B), the prefetching zone includes the image display device 5 and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B, and straddles the image display device 5 and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B. By displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 for notifying that the effect is being performed, it is possible to perform suitable display by the image display device 5 and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B.

(Example 3 of the rendering operation regarding the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (C) is provided with the image display device 5 as the first display means, and the Versa Lighter 38SH5C as the second display means.

  The Versa Lighter 38SH5C is a display device using the afterimage effect of human eyes. The Versa Lighter 38SH5C uses the residual image of the LED light generated by rotating the plate 38SH5C1 while flashing a plurality of LEDs arranged on the longitudinal side of the plate 38SH5C1 in a short cycle in accordance with a specific pattern, to produce various effects. Display an image.

  The display control unit 123 performs rotation control of the versher writer 38SH5C and lighting control of the LED by supplying a video signal corresponding to the executed effect to the versher writer 38SH5C based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. The effect image is displayed on the Versa Lighter 38SH5C. In addition, as for the verse lighter 38SH5C, a range in which various effect images can be displayed by the LED at the time of the rotation operation becomes a display area. In this example, the plate 38SH5C1 of the versher writer 38SH5C is provided such that the display area of the versher writer 38SH5C is aligned on the right side of the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the left-right direction from the right end in the display region of the burster writer 38SH5C to the left end in the display region of the image display device 5 across the image display device 5 and the burster writer 38SH5C.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to move from the right end to the left side in the display area of the versa writer 38SH5C. When the character of the character information 38SH31 reaches the left end of the display area of the burster writer 38SH5C, it is not displayed with further movement. As described above, when character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the burster writer 38SH5C as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right to the left in the burster writer 38SH5C, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the character information on the burster writer 38SH5C. The character 38SH31 is displayed to be moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left. Then, when the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, the characters are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the image display device 5 as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right to the left on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to The character of the character information 38SH31 which is not displayed is displayed again so as to move it from the right end to the left of the display area of the burster writer 38SH5C.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), it is provided that the image display device 5 and the burster writer 38SH5C are provided, and that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed across the image display device 5 and the burster writer 38SH5C. By displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 to be notified, it is possible to perform suitable display by the image display device 5 and the versa writer 38SH5C.

(Description 2 about feature 38SH (40SH))
In addition, the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) can display characters as related displays, and when displaying related displays across the first display means and the second display means, the first display means It is possible to display characters larger than the size of the non-display area between the display area of the second display means and the display area of the second display means.

(Example operation of effect on the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) 4)
FIG. 20-28 is an enlarged view of an essential part in which a portion where the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A are adjacent to each other is enlarged. In the image display device 5 of this example, a display area is formed inside the frame portion 38SH5F. Similarly, in the sub-image display device 38SH5A, a display area is formed inside the frame portion 38SH5AF.

  When the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across such an image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A, the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 correspond to the display area of the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A. Is displayed across the display area of. As described above, when displaying the characters of the character information 38SH31, the display area of the image display device 5 is used in such a display mode that a part of the characters is hidden in a portion corresponding to the frame portion 38SH5F and the frame portion 38SH5AF. And characters displayed across the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A may be difficult to recognize or unrecognizable.

  Here, the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF of the sub-image display device 38SH5A are known dimensions. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 adds the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F and the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A. The character information 38SH31 of the font size with a longer font size is displayed for the length L2 in the width direction of each character than the size L1.

  However, even if the length L2 in the width direction of each character is a longer font size than the length L1 in which the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F and the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF are added, as a result, In some cases, characters displayed across the display area of 5 and the display area of the sub image display device 38SH5A may be difficult or unrecognizable. Therefore, it is simulated at the design stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 whether the human can distinguish the character when the character information of the telop image such as the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A. The font size of the character information may be determined by the user. In addition, even when the font size is the same, characters that are visible when recognized across the display area of the image display device 5 and the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A in the form of characters are difficult to recognize or recognize Some characters are impossible. For example, even if the character "Z" is visible, the character "I" is likely to be difficult or unrecognizable if the vertical line is hidden. Therefore, when a character string in which characters that are difficult to recognize or likely to be unrecognizable are displayed as character information, it is possible to prevent recognition difficulty or unrecognizable by using bold or italic characters.

  Note that, for example, when the sub image display device 38SH5A is moved to the front of the display area of the image display device 5 and a part of the display area of the image display device 5 is hidden by the sub image display device 38SH5A, the image display device 5 Since the frame portion 38SH5F is hidden by the sub image display device 38SH5A, the character information 38SH31 of the font size in which the length L2 in the width direction of each character is longer than the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF of the sub image display device 38SH5A Display it.

  Similarly, when the image display device 5 is moved to the front of the display region of the sub image display device 38SH5A so that a part of the display region of the sub image display device 38SH5A is hidden by the image display device 5, the sub image display device 38SH5A Since the frame portion 38SH5F is hidden by the image display device 5, the character information 38SH31 of the font size in which the length L2 in the width direction of each character is longer than the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 is displayed. Just do it.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20-28, when the character information 38SH31 can be displayed as the zone telop image 38SH30 and the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A. Furthermore, the length L2 in the width direction of each character is greater than the length L1 in which the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF of the sub image display device 38SH5A are added. The zone telop image 38SH30 can be suitably displayed by displaying the character information 38SH31 of the long font size.

(Description about feature 38SH (40SH) 3)
Further, when displaying the related display across the first display means and the second display means, the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) can recognize the content of the related display by only one of the display means. It can be displayed.

(Exemplary operation example 5 for the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
In the example shown in FIG. 20-29 (A), when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 51, all the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are images Since it is displayed in the display area of the display device 5, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized only by the image display device 5.

(Exemplary operation example 6 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
In the example shown in FIG. 20-29 (B), when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 51, all the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are As displayed in the display area of the image display device 38SH5A, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized only by the sub-image display device 38SH5A.

  Here, the width dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 and the width dimension of the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A are known dimensions. Therefore, in the design stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a font size capable of displaying all the characters of the text information of the telop image such as the zone telop image 38SH30 in the display area of the image display 5 or the display area of the sub image display 38SH5A The font size that can be displayed on can be determined.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20-29, when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A, all the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are Preferably, all characters in the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed in the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A so as to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 Zone telop image 38SH30 can be displayed. For example, even if characters displayed across the display area of the image display device 5 and the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A are difficult to recognize or can not be recognized, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 It becomes recognizable.

(Description about feature 38SH (40SH) 4)
In addition, the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH), as the related display, the first related display capable of displaying characters across the first display means and the second display means, and the first display means and the second display It is possible to display a second related display capable of displaying characters without straddling the means, and the characters displayed in the first related display and the characters displayed in the second related display Size is different.

(Exemplary operation example 7 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
In the example shown in FIG. 20-30 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the left-right direction so that characters straddle the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 extending vertically. Therefore, the characters of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 in this example are not displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A.

  Here, in the case of displaying a plurality of telop images such as the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50, it is easier to recognize the content of each telop image if the sizes of characters in the telop images are different.

  On the other hand, as described above, when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A, the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the frame of the sub image display device 38SH5A The zone telop image 38SH30 is preferably displayed by displaying the character information 38SH31 of the font size in which the length L2 in the width direction of each character is longer than the length L1 in which the width dimension of the portion 38SH5AF is added. be able to.

  For this reason, the size of the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 displayed across the image display 5 and the sub-image display 38SH5A tends to be large. Therefore, when making the size of the character of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 different from the size of the character of the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50, the size of the character of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is If the size of the characters of the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 is increased, the visibility is enhanced simply because the characters are large, but the display area for displaying the effect image of the pre-reading zone effect is only narrowed. Or, it looks clumsy as a whole.

  Therefore, when displaying such zone telop image 38SH30 and pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50, the effect control CPU 120 makes pseudo run so that the character size of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is smaller than that of the character information 38SH31. By displaying the character information 38SH51 of the telop image 38SH50, in other words, by displaying the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to be a character larger than the size of the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo serial telop image 38SH50. The display area for displaying the effect image of the pre-reading zone effect can be sufficiently secured, and the whole can be prevented from having an unsightly appearance.

(Exemplary operation example 8 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
In the example shown in FIG. 20-30 (B), the effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the left-right direction so that characters straddle the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 extending in the vertical direction on the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Therefore, the characters of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 in this example are not displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A.

  Also in the case of this example, the effect control CPU 120 is a character smaller than the character size of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 in displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50. Thus, by displaying the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50, in other words, the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to be a character larger than the size of the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient display area for displaying the effect image of the pre-reading zone effect and prevent the appearance as a whole as a whole.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), a zone telop image 38SH30 extending laterally is displayed so that characters straddle the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Alternatively, when displaying the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 extending up and down on the sub image display device 38SH5A, if a display area for displaying the effect image of the pre-reading zone effect can be sufficiently secured, or the whole looks clunky If this is not the case, the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 may be displayed so as to be a character larger than the size of the character of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 20-30, a zone telop image 38SH30 capable of displaying character information 38SH31 across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A, an image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A The pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 capable of displaying the character information 38SH51 can be displayed without straddling, and the characters of the character information 38SH31 displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 are displayed. Since the size of the character differs depending on the character information 38SH51, the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 can be suitably displayed.

  Note that, for a telop image in a mode in which characters do not straddle the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A, the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the width of the frame portion 38SH5AF of the sub image display device 38SH5A Character information of a font size in which the length in the width direction of each character is shorter than the length obtained by adding the dimension may be displayed.

(Exemplary operation example 9 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) is also applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A are vertically adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. 20-31. . That is, the effect control CPU 120 can display, for example, a zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that pre-reading zone effect is being executed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A arranged vertically. .

  In such a mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A, the height dimension of the lower frame of the image display device 5, and It is sufficient to display character information 38SH31 of a font size in which the length in the height direction of each character is longer than the length obtained by adding the height dimension of the upper portion of the sub image display device 38SH5D.

  In addition, about the telop image 38SH50 of the aspect which does not straddle the image display apparatus 5 and subimage display apparatus 38SH5D, the height dimension of the flame | frame of the lower part of the image display apparatus 5 and the flame | frame of the upper part of subimage display apparatus 38SH5D The character information 38SH51 of the font size may be displayed, in which the length in the height direction of each character is shorter than the length obtained by adding the height dimension of and.

(Additional note on the features 38SH (40SH))
(1) The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.), which comprises the first display means (eg the image display device 5 etc.) , And a second display unit (for example, a sub image display device 38SH5A etc.), and it is possible to display a related display related to a predetermined state across the first display unit and the second display unit (for example, an image A zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that the prefetch zone effect is being executed is displayed across the display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), characters (for example, character information 38SH31 or the like) can be displayed as related displays (for example, zone telop image 38SH30 or the like), and the first display means and the second display When displaying the related display across the means, it is possible to display characters larger than the size of the non-display area between the display area of the first display means and the display area of the second display means (for example, The width of each character in the width direction is longer than the sum of the width of the frame 38SH5F of the image display 5 and the width of the frame 38SH5AF of the sub-image display 38SH5A. Displaying character information 38SH 31 etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), when displaying a related display (for example, zone telop image 38SH30 etc.) across the first display means and the second display means, The content of the related display may be recognizably displayed only by the display means (for example, all the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or , All characters in the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed in the display area of the sub image display device 38SH5A, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), it is possible to display characters (for example, character information 38SH31 etc.) across the first display means and the second display means as related displays. Second related display (for example, zone telop image 38SH30 etc.), and a second related display capable of displaying characters (for example, character information 38SH51 etc.) without straddling the first display means and the second display means (For example, pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 etc.) can be displayed, and the size of the character is different between the character displayed in the first related display and the character displayed in the second related display (For example, the character information 38SH5 of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 so as to be a character smaller than the size of the character of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 It displays, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

(Description of the feature portion 38SH (40SH) and the feature portion 31AK)
Next, the features 38SH (39SH) and the features 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. A game machine having the features 38SH (39SH) and the feature 31AK is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is controlled to the first display means and the second display means in an advantageous state And a title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect. Then, the title notification means can display the title corresponding to the indication effect over the first display means and the second display means as the related display related to the predetermined state when the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the indication effect It is.

(Description of Feature 38SH (41SH) and Feature 38SH (42SH))
Next, the features 38SH (41SH) and the features 38SH (42SH) of the present embodiment will be described.

  The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and the display means and the specific means for executing a specific effect to give a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means It is possible to display related displays related to a predetermined state, and to display, as related displays, a first related display receiving a change due to a specific effect and a second related display not receiving a change due to a specific effect It is.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH), the first related display is a related display related to the effect state, and the second related display is a related display related to the gaming state.

  In addition, in the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH), the first related display is displayed in a mode accompanied by an operation, and is also displayed in a mode accompanied by an operation even when the specific effect is changed. .

  On the other hand, the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and executes a specific effect which gives common changes to the display means and a plurality of displays displayed on the display means And the display means can display the related display related to the predetermined state in a mode accompanied by the operation, and the related display operates even when the specific effect is changed. It can be displayed in the accompanying manner.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH), it is possible to display, as related displays, a first related display that receives a change due to a specific effect and a second related display that does not receive a change due to a specific effect.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH), the first related display is a related display related to the effect state, and the second related display is a related display related to the gaming state.

(Example operation of rendering the feature 38SH (41SH) and the feature 38SH (42SH))
FIG. 20-32 shows an example of rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (41SH) and the feature portion 38SH (42SH). In this example, as a specific effect for giving a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means, a reduction effect for reducing the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate will be described as an example. Further, in this example, a big hit telop image for notifying that the big hit is being performed is shown as an example of a display that receives a change due to a specific effect and that is a first related display related to the effect state. Further, in this example, an error telop image for notifying an error will be described as an example of a display that does not receive a change due to a specific effect and is a second related display related to the gaming state.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute a reduction effect that reduces a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display an error telop image notifying an error. In the example shown in FIG. 20-32, an example will be described in which an error telop image 38SH90 for notifying of an abnormality in which the lower plate is full is notified by the character information 39SH91 of "Please remove the ball".

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10, for example, on the condition that the big hit middle effect is being executed. Also, for example, when it is detected that the lower tray is full, the effect control CPU 120 displays the error telop image 38SH90. Therefore, when it is detected that the lower tray is full in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the error telop image 38SH90, as shown in FIG. Will be displayed at the same time.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the reduction effect on condition that the execution timing of the reduction effect is reached, and reduces the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate. Therefore, when it becomes execution timing of reduction production in the big hit game state, as for production control CPU120, as shown in Figure 20-32 (B), the character image and the indication which shows the number of rounds in the big hit game state for example Reduce the multiple displays displayed during the jackpot effect at a common reduction rate. Then, by executing the reduction effect, a black display area outside area 38SHBK is formed around the changed display. By performing such a reduction effect, the interest of the effect can be improved.

  At this time, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 at a common reduction rate, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (B). That is, the big hit telop image 38SH10 related to the production state of the big hit and middle production receives a change due to the reduction production.

  Here, if the situation where the lower plate is full continues to be left, the warning sound continues to be emitted along with the display of the error telop image 38SH90 until the situation is resolved, which causes the surrounding players to be annoyed. I will.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not reduce the error telop image 38SH90 even if the reduction effect is executed. That is, the error telop image 38SH90 associated with the game state of error does not receive a change due to the reduction effect.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-32, it is possible to execute a reduction effect that reduces the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate, and the big hit telop image 38SH10 that receives a change due to the reduction effect. And since it is possible to display the error telop image 38SH90 which is not affected by the reduction effect, the interest of the effect can be improved by the telop image 38SH10 receiving a change due to the reduction effect, while the error telop image 38SH90 is reduced. It is possible to continue to properly notify that the lower tray is full by not receiving the change due to the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-32, a big hit telop image, which is a display that receives a change due to a specific effect and reports that a big hit is being performed, is a first relevant display related to the effect state. In the case of a telop including character information displayed for the purpose of notifying the player as in the case of a big hit telop image, it is a display which does not receive a change due to a specific effect and is related to the gaming state. It may be displayed as a second related display.

  On the other hand, a telop containing text information related to an effect that is not for the purpose of notifying the player, like a telop containing text information indicating the lyrics of music, is a display that receives a change due to a specific effect. It is a display that can be displayed as a first related display related to the effect state, but is a display that does not receive a change due to a specific effect, and can not be displayed as a second related display related to the gaming state.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 30-32, an error telop image which is a display which does not receive a change due to a specific effect and which notifies an abnormality that the lower plate is full as a second related display related to the gaming state. In the example described above, so-called controller connection error, vibration motor abnormal error, magnet error, switch abnormal error, incorrect winning error, payout error, main control board communication failure, sub board mismatch error, out-of-ball error, card unit error The telop image notifying various kinds of errors is also a display not receiving the change due to the specific effect, and can be displayed as a second related display related to the gaming state.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a telop to be displayed together with an effect having a high probability of big hit other than a telop to notify the gaming state like a telop to notify that it is controlled to a definite change state or a short time state. It is also possible to display telops that are executed together with important renditions as telops that are not affected by the specific rendition.

(Example 2 of the rendering operation relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH))
FIGS. 20-33 show another rendering operation example regarding the feature part 38SH (41SH) and the feature part 38SH (42SH). In this example, as a specific effect for giving a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means, an enlargement effect for expanding the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common enlargement factor will be described as an example.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlargement effect that enlarges a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common enlargement ratio.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10, for example, on the condition that the big hit middle effect is being executed. Also, for example, when it is detected that the lower tray is full, the effect control CPU 120 displays the error telop image 38SH90. Therefore, when it is detected that the lower tray is full in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the error telop image 38SH90 as shown in FIG. Will be displayed at the same time.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the enlargement effect on condition that the execution timing of the enlargement effect is reached, and enlarges the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common enlargement ratio. Therefore, when it becomes the execution timing of expansion production in the big hit game state, as for production control CPU120, as shown in Figure 20-33 (B), the indication which shows the number of rounds in the character image and the big hit game state for example Expand the multiple displays displayed during the jackpot effect at a common enlargement factor. Then, by performing the enlargement effect, the plurality of displays changed by the enlargement effect can not be included in the display area of the image display device 5. By performing such an enlargement effect, the interest of the effect can be improved.

  At this time, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 at a common enlargement ratio, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (B). That is, the big hit telop image 38SH10 related to the production state of the big hit and middle effect receives a change due to the enlargement effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not enlarge the error telop image 38SH90 even if the enlargement effect is executed. That is, the error telop image 38SH90 related to the game state of error does not receive a change due to the enlargement effect.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-33, it is possible to execute an enlargement effect for enlarging a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common enlargement ratio, and the big hit telop image 38SH10 that receives a change due to the enlargement effect. And since it is possible to display the error telop image 38SH90 which does not receive the change due to the enlargement effect, the interest of the effect can be improved by the telop image 38SH10 receiving the change due to the enlargement effect, while the error telop image 38SH90 is enlarged It is possible to continue to properly notify that the lower tray is full by not receiving the change due to the effect.

(Exemplary operation example 3 concerning the feature portion 38SH (41SH) and the feature portion 38SH (42SH))
FIG. 20-32 shows an example of rendering operation relating to the feature portion 38SH (41SH) and the feature portion 38SH (42SH). In this example, as a specific effect for giving a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means, an image blur effect in which the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 are vibrated together will be described as an example.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute an image blur effect that vibrates a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 together.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10, for example, on the condition that the big hit middle effect is being executed. Also, for example, when it is detected that the lower tray is full, the effect control CPU 120 displays the error telop image 38SH90. Therefore, when it is detected that the lower tray is full in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the error telop image 38SH90, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (A). Will be displayed at the same time.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the image blur effect on condition that the execution timing of the image blur effect is reached, and vibrates a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 collectively. Therefore, when the execution timing of the image blur effect comes in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, a character image or a display indicating the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B) And vibrate a plurality of displays displayed during a big hit effect. Then, by executing the blurring effect, a black display area outside area 38SHBK is formed around the changed display. By performing such an image blur effect, the interest of the effect can be improved.

  At this time, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the big hit telop image 38SH10 together with other displays as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B). That is, the big hit telop image 38SH10 related to the effect state of the big hit and middle effect receives the change due to the blurring effect.

  Here, if the situation where the lower plate is full continues to be left, the warning sound continues to be emitted along with the display of the error telop image 38SH90 until the situation is resolved, which causes the surrounding players to be annoyed. I will.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not vibrate the error telop image 38SH90 even if the image blur effect is executed. That is, the error telop image 38SH90 associated with the game state of error does not receive a change due to the blurring effect.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-34, it is possible to execute an image blur effect that vibrates a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 together and receives a change due to the image blur effect and the big hit telop image 38SH10 Since it is possible to display an error telop image 38SH90 which does not receive a change due to an image blur effect, the interest of the effect can be improved by the telop image 38SH10 receiving a change due to an image blur effect, while the error telop image 38SH90 By not receiving the change due to the blurring effect, it is possible to properly notify that the lower tray is full.

  (Operation example 4 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH))

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 20-35, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the big hit telop image 38SH10 together with other displays when executing the image blur effect.

  Here, as described above, the CPU 120 for effect control can display the big hit telop image 38SH10 notifying that the big hit is being performed while the character information 38SH11 moves. When the CPU 120 for effect control in this example changes the big hit telop image 38SH10 by image blurring effect as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B) showing the state immediately after the state shown in FIG. 20-35 (A) Also, the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is moved.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-35, the big hit telop image 38SH10 is displayed in a mode in which the character information 38SH11 moves, and the character information 38SH11 moves even when it is changed by execution of the blurring effect. By displaying in the form, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect when the blurring effect is performed.

(Description about feature 38SH (41SH) and feature 38SH (42SH))
In addition, in the gaming machine having the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) or the characteristic part 38SH (42SH), the display area outside area appears in response to the specific effect being executed, and the second related display straddles the display area outside area. The content can be displayed in a recognizable manner even when displayed across an area outside the display area.

(Example operation of effect on feature 38SH (41SH) and feature 38SH (42SH) 5)
FIGS. 20-36 show a state in which the blurring effect is performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-36, an error telop image 39SH90 in which mostly black-black character information 38SH91 is displayed on the front surface of a translucent belt-like background image will be described as an example.

  As described above, the error telop image 38SH90 does not receive a change due to the blurring effect. Therefore, for example, when an error telop image 38SH90 extending from the left end to the right end in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed, the blurring effect is executed, so that the error telop image 38SH90 is an area outside the black display area It will be displayed across 38SHBK.

  In that case, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (A), when the character information 38SH91 of the error telop image 38SH90 is displayed in the display area corresponding to the area outside the display area 38SHBK, it looks like a translucent background image It is difficult for the blackout character information 38SH91 to be visually recognized assimilation in the black display area outside area 38SHBK, and the content of the error telop image 38SH90 becomes difficult to be recognized.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (B), the character information 38SH91 of the error telop image 38SH90 is moved, and all the characters of the character information 38SH91 are displayed in the display changed by the blurring effect. By doing this, the contents of the error telop image 38SH90 can be recognized.

  Note that all the characters of the character information 38SH91 may not be simultaneously displayed in the display changed by the blurring effect. For example, by moving the character information 38SH91 of the error telop image 38SH90, as a result that the characters of the character information 38SH91 are sequentially displayed in the display changed by the blurring effect, if all the characters can be viewed in order, the character information Even when all the characters of 38SH91 can not be simultaneously displayed in the display changed by the blurring effect, the contents of the error telop image 38SH90 can be recognized.

(Exemplary operation example 6 concerning the feature portion 38SH (41SH) and the feature portion 38SH (42SH))
FIGS. 20-37 show a state in which the blurring effect is performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-37, an error telop image 39SH90 in which mostly white white character information 38SH91 is displayed on the front surface of the translucent belt-like background image will be described as an example.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-37 (A) and (B), even if the character information 38SH91 of the error telop image 38SH90 is displayed in the display area corresponding to the area outside the display area 38SHBK, it is translucent. Since it does not assimilate to the black display outside area 38SHBK seen through the background image, the white character information 38SH91 can be visually recognized, and the contents of the error telop image 38SH90 can be recognized.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-36 and 20-37, the area 38SHBK outside the display area appears in response to execution of the blurring effect, and the error telop image 38SH90 straddles the area 38SHBK outside the display area. The error telop image 38SH90 can be suitably displayed by being displayed in a recognizable manner even when displayed across the display area outside the display area 38SHBK.

(Additional note on the features 38SH (41SH))
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and the display unit (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) Specific effect means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs reduction of a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 by a common reduction ratio) for executing a specific effect giving common changes to the plurality of displays displayed on the display means And the display means is a related display related to a predetermined state (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that a big hit is being performed during a big hit, a lower tray, etc.) Can display an error telop image 38SH90 or the like that reports an abnormality that is full, and as a related display, a first related display (for example, A big hit telop image 38SH10 etc.) that undergoes a change due to the small effect, the second related display free from changes due to specific effect (e.g., is capable of displaying an error telop image 38SH90 etc.) and not subject to change due to the reduced effect.

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the first related display is a related display related to the effect state (for example, that the big hit telop image 38SH10 is a telop image notifying a big hit during the middle etc), (2) The related display may be a related display related to the gaming state (for example, the error telop image 38SH90 is a telop image notifying an abnormality that the lower plate is full, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the first related display is displayed in a mode with operation (for example, displaying the big hit telop image 38SH10 in a mode in which the character information 38SH11 moves, etc. ), It may be displayed in a mode accompanied by an operation even when the specific effect is changed (for example, the character information 38SH11 moves even when it is changed by the image blurring effect being performed) Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the area outside the display area (for example, the area outside the display area 38SHBK) in response to the execution of the specific effect (for example, blurring effect etc.) Etc.), and the second related display can be displayed across the area outside the display area, and the content may be displayed in a recognizable manner even when displayed across the area outside the display area (for example, The error telop image 38SH90 can be displayed across the outside display area 38SHBK, and the content can be recognized in a recognizable manner even when displayed across the outside display area 38SHBK).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

(Description of the feature portion 38SH (41SH) and the feature portion 31AK)
Next, the features 38SH (41SH) and the features 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the feature portion 38SH (41SH) and the feature portion 31AK is a gaming machine which can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is common to the display means and a plurality of displays displayed on the display means. A specific effect means for executing a specific effect giving a change, a suggested effect execution means capable of executing a suggested effect suggesting control to an advantageous state, and a title notification means capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggested effect Prepare. Then, the title notification means can display the title corresponding to the indication effect as a related display related to the predetermined state when the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the indication effect. Further, as the related display related to the predetermined state, it is possible to display a first related display that receives a change due to a specific effect and a second related display that does not receive a change due to the specific effect.

(Additional note on the features 38SH (42SH))
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.), and the display means (for example, the image display device 5 etc.) Specific effect means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs reduction of a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 by a common reduction ratio) for executing a specific effect giving common changes to the plurality of displays displayed on the display means And the display means is capable of displaying the related display related to the predetermined state in a mode accompanied by an operation (for example, during the execution of the jackpot middle effect) To display a big hit telop image 38SH10 to inform the user in such a manner that the character information 38SH11 moves), the related display also involves an operation even when the specific effect is changed. Can be displayed in a mode (e.g., character information 38SH11 even when the change by effect image blur is performed is displayed in a manner to move, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), as the related display, a first related display (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 or the like which receives a change due to a reduction effect) and a change due to the specific effect A second related display not received (for example, an error telop image 38SH90 which does not receive a change due to a reduction effect) may be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

  (3) In the gaming machine of (2), the first related display is a related display related to the effect state (for example, that the big hit telop image 38SH10 is a telop image notifying a big hit, etc.), (2) The related display may be a related display related to the gaming state (for example, the error telop image 38SH90 is a telop image notifying an abnormality that the lower plate is full, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), an area outside the display area appears in response to the execution of the specific effect, and a second related display straddles the area outside the display area. The contents may be displayed in a recognizable manner even when displayed across the display area outside the display area.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the related display.

(Description of the features 38SH (42SH) and the features 31AK)
Next, the features 38SH (42SH) and the features 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the feature portion 38SH (42SH) and the feature portion 31AK is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is common to the display means and a plurality of displays displayed on the display means. A specific effect means for executing a specific effect giving a change, a suggested effect execution means capable of executing a suggested effect suggesting control to an advantageous state, and a title notification means capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggested effect Prepare. Then, the title notification means can display the title corresponding to the suggested effect when the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect, as an associated display related to the predetermined state, in an aspect accompanied by an operation. And related display can be displayed in a mode with operation also when changing by performing specific production.

(Description of Feature 38SH (63IW) 1)
Next, the feature portion 38SH (63IW) of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine for playing a game, and includes display means capable of displaying related display related to a predetermined state, and the display means is formed to extend in a plurality of directions. The display can be displayed.

(Description of feature 38SH (63IW) 2)
Further, the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine for playing a game, and comprises display means capable of displaying a related display related to a predetermined state, and the display means displays the related display formed in a curved shape. It can be displayed.

(Exemplary operation example 1 concerning the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW))
Next, the display mode in the case of displaying the related display regarding a predetermined state is demonstrated. FIGS. 20-38 is an explanatory view showing a display example of a right-handed designation image. In FIG. 20-38, the mode of the display screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  In this embodiment, in the high base state (i.e., a positive change state or a short time state), an operation indication effect of displaying on the image display device 5 a right strike instruction image instructing a right strike is performed as a related display (for example, , Steps S673 and S676).

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-38, in the image display device 5, a right-handed instruction image 38SH200a consisting of a curved area is displayed. In this embodiment, when the right-handed operation is performed, the game balls fired from the ball hitting and emitting apparatus move in an arc along the ball striking rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7 , And then come down to the right area of the game area 7. That is, the right strike instruction image 38SH200a formed of a curved area has a shape similar to the trajectory of the gaming ball when the right strike operation is performed. The right-handed instruction image 38SH 200 a is configured in such a manner that the character string “→ right-handed right →” is included in the area formed in a curved shape. By adopting such an aspect, the player can intuitively recognize the instruction content, and can effectively instruct a right strike.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-38 (1) to (4), in the right-handed instruction image 38SH 200a, the character string “→ right-handed →” moves from the left end to the right end in the area formed in a curved shape. It is displayed by such an aspect. By adopting such an aspect, the player can easily recognize the instruction content, and it is possible to more effectively issue a right strike.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 (5) to (6), the right-handed instruction image 38SH 200a is a character string “→ right-handed → deleted because the right-hand portion of the area formed in a curved shape is reached. "" Is displayed in such a manner as to be displayed again from the left end.

  Note that the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 20-38, but, for example, a plurality of character strings "→ right-handed →" move from the left end to the right end You may make it display by the aspect which is done. In addition, the character string is not limited to moving at a constant speed, but may be one in which the moving speed changes midway or may be stopped. Specifically, in the area from the left end to the center in the curved area, the moving speed of the character string is faster than the area from the center to the right end. Good. Alternatively, the display may be stopped for a predetermined period when the character string is displayed from the left end, and may be displayed for a predetermined period after moving to the right end. In addition, the movement speed may be changed a plurality of times (for example, high speed → low speed → high speed, high speed → medium speed → low speed, etc.), and the movement speed changes and the stop display is made at a predetermined position. It may be

  FIG. 20-39 is an explanatory view showing a display example of the left hitting designation image. In FIG. 20-39, the form of the display screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  In this embodiment, when transitioning from the high base state (i.e., the positive change state or the short time state) to the low base state (i.e., the normal state), the left hit instruction image instructing left hit is displayed as the related display. The operation instruction effect to be displayed on the screen is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, corresponding to the process of step S 671).

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-39, in the image display device 5, a left hitting instruction image 38SH200b consisting of a curved area is displayed. Further, the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b is configured in such a manner as to include the character string "← left-handed ←" in the area formed in a curved shape.

  As described above, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a has a shape similar to the trajectory of the gaming ball when the right-handed operation is performed, and the character string “→ right-handed →” It is displayed in such a manner as to move from the left end to the right end. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 20-39 (1) to (4), the left hitting instruction image 38SH200b instructing to return from right hitting to left hitting has the same shape as the right hitting instruction image 38SH200a. However, in the area formed in a curvilinear shape, the character string “← left ←” is displayed in such a manner as to move from the right end to the left end. That is, the shape of the left hitting instruction image 38SH 200 b and the display mode of the character string indicate how to change from the trajectory of the game ball at the time of right hitting. By adopting such an aspect, the player can easily recognize the instruction content, and the left hit can be more effectively instructed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-39 (5) to (6), the left-handed instruction image 38SH 200 b is a character string “に よ り left-handed ← deleted because it reached the left end of the area formed in a curved shape. "" Is displayed in such a manner as to be displayed again from the right end.

  The right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39 are, for example, display positions of character strings (“→ right-handed →” or “left-handed ←”) in the area. Is composed of a plurality of different images. By reproducing moving image data, a right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and a left-handed instruction image 38SH200b may be realized as shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b can be displayed in a curvilinear form to form a uniform rectangular shape. These images can be displayed more effectively than when display is possible only by the above aspect, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39, the right hitting indication image 38SH200a and the left hitting indication image 38SH200b can be displayed by moving a character string in a predetermined area. The image can be displayed effectively, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b can be recognized in such a manner that all character strings can be recognized (for example, they are erased by reaching the left end portion These images can be effectively displayed by displaying the character string by displaying a part of the character string again from the right end, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-38 and FIG. 20-39, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b can be displayed in a mode according to the game state (for example, high base state (ie, When right-handed is effective, the character string “→ right-handed →” is displayed by moving from the left end to the right end in the area, and when in the low base state (that is, left-handed is valid) These images can be effectively displayed by displaying the character string “← ← ← に よ り” by moving from the right end to the left end in the area, and the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 20-40 is an explanatory view showing a display example of an effect commentary image on development effect. In FIG. 20-40, the mode of the display screen transitions in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  In this embodiment, during reach, development effects can be implemented that suggest development to a more reliable reach. FIG. 20-40 shows a development effect of an aspect in which if the character challenges the minefield and passes, it develops into a more reliable reach, and if the character can not pass, the release is determined.

  When the development effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 20-40 (1) and (2), while the mines 38SH201a to 38SH201c are displayed on the image display device 5, in order to explain the development effect as a related display The presentation commentary image 38SH200c is displayed. The effect commentary image 38SH200c is configured in a mode including a zigzag arrow-shaped region indicating a route avoiding the land mines 38SH201a to 38SH201c. Specifically, the arrow-shaped region includes an arrowhead portion and an arrowhead portion, and the arrowhead portion is formed in a zigzag shape by having two bending portions. That is, the effect commentary image 38SH200c has a bending portion and includes an area formed to extend in a plurality of directions (in other words, an area formed of a plurality of linear areas extending in different directions). It is configured.

  In addition, the effect commentary image 38SH200c is configured in a mode including a character string “advance to avoid land mines” in an arrow-shaped region formed in a zigzag shape, which indicates that the development effect is to challenge the passage of the minefield. . In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-40 (1) and (2), in the effect commentary image 38SH 200 c, in the arrow-shaped region formed in a zigzag shape, the character string “advance to avoid land mines” has a lower end to an upper end. It is displayed in such a manner as to move to a part. Also, when the character string "advance to avoid land mines" reaches the upper end, the characters are erased one by one, and the erased characters are displayed again from the lower end. That is, a series of displays shown in FIGS. 20-40 (1) and (2) are repeatedly performed for a predetermined period. By setting it as such an aspect, it can be effectively shown that it is an effect aiming at avoiding the land mine from the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 to the upper direction, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect Can.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-40 (1) and (2), a part of the character string "advance to avoid land mines" is displayed in the arrow-shaped region formed in a zigzag shape in the effect commentary image 38SH 200c. Then, although it is an aspect by which the whole is displayed gradually, the aspect by which the whole of a character string "avoid mines and advance" may always be displayed may be sufficient. Also, in addition to the presentation commentary image 38SH200c, a detailed description of the presentation (specifically, if the character tries to pass through the minefield and can pass, it will develop into a more reliable reach, and if it can not pass, it will be off You may make it display the production commentary image for which it is shown to decide. Further, in addition to the display of the effect commentary image 38SH200c, the speaker 27 may output a voice "advance to avoid land mines". In this case, for example, this voice is output at the timing when the display of the character string shown in FIG. 20-40 (1) is started. Further, for the effect commentary image 38SH200c, for example, an aspect in which the shape, color, size, etc. of the area are different, or font, color, size, movement mode (for example, speed, number of pauses), etc. Depending on which aspect is displayed, the degree of expectation of success in passing the minefield may be different.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-40 (3), in the image display device 5, the effect commentary image 38SH200c is erased, and a character 38SH202 that challenges passage of a minefield is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-40 (4A) to (5A), when the character succeeds in passing the land mines 38SH201a to 38SH201c, it is reported that the development to a more reliable SP reach is reported. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 20-40 (4B) to (5B), when an effect is produced in which the character touches the mine 38SH 201 c and explodes (that is, the character fails to pass the mine 38 SH 201 a to 38 SH 201 c and fails) Then, the effect that the release is determined is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 20-40, the effect commentary image 38SH200c has a bending portion and is formed to extend in a plurality of directions (in other words, formed of a plurality of linear regions extending in different directions) Enables display of more character strings than when display is possible only by an aspect formed in a uniform rectangular shape, and the contents of the development effect can be displayed. It is possible to display effectively and to improve the rendering effect. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-40, an arrow type region having two bends is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and an aspect having one bend may be employed, and The aspect which has three or more bending parts may be sufficient. In the example shown in FIG. 20-40, an arrow type region having a bending portion bent at a right angle is shown, but the bending angle may be other than a right angle, and the bending angle at each bending portion is It may be different.

  A combination of the example shown in FIGS. 20-38 to 20-39 and the example shown in FIG. 20-40 has a curved region and a bent portion so as to extend in a plurality of directions. It is also possible to use the related display configured in the aspect including the formed area. For example, the effect commentary image may be configured to include an area formed in an “Ω” shape, and a character string for explaining the contents of the effect may be moved in the area.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-40, the effect commentary image is configured by an aspect including a region formed to extend in a plurality of directions in a plane, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and three-dimensional It may be constituted by the mode containing the field formed so that it might extend in a plurality of directions.

  FIG. 20: is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the production commentary image regarding a character item production. Here, it is assumed that a feature effect can be performed that moves the movable member in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

  As shown in FIG. 20-41 (A1), in the image display device 5, as a related display, effect commentary image 38SH 200e indicating that a feature effect is to be performed is displayed as a related display. The effect commentary image 38SH200e indicates the movement direction of the movable member, a vertically extending region and a horizontally extending region (strictly speaking, as shown in FIG. (That is, an area depicted on the display screen of the image display device 5). That is, the effect commentary image 38SH200e is configured in such a manner as to include regions formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions in a three-dimensional manner.

  Further, the effect commentary image 38SH 200 e includes a character string “drop” indicating the operation content of the movable member in the region extending in the vertical direction, and indicates the operation content of the movable member in the region extending in the horizontal direction. It is comprised by the aspect containing character string "jump out." By setting it as such an aspect, it is possible to effectively suggest the contents of the feature effect in which the movable member operates in three dimensions, and it is possible to enhance the effect. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41, a mode is shown in which one bending portion is bent in the vertical direction from the vertical direction, but the embodiment is not limited to such a mode, and an embodiment having two or more bending portions It may be For example, the aspect which has a bending part bent in the horizontal direction from the perpendicular direction, and a bending part bent in the perpendicular direction from the horizontal direction may be sufficient. Further, a region formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions in a plane as shown in FIG. 20-40 and a region formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions in three dimensions as shown in FIG. It may be an aspect including.

  In addition, as shown to FIGS. 20-41 (B1)-(B4), you may make it change the shape of the area | region shown by production commentary image 38SH200e. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-41 (B1) to (B4), the effect commentary image 38SH 200 e is horizontal when the character string “drop” reaches the lower end from the upper end in the vertically extending region. An extended area is added (FIG. 20-41 (B3)). Then, the character string "jump out" is displayed by moving in the horizontally extending area from the upper end to the lower end (that is, the appearance that it seems to move from the gaming machine side to the player side) 20-41 (B4) to (B5).

  The configuration of the present embodiment is also applicable to an operation instruction notification for instructing a player to perform a predetermined operation.

  FIGS. 20-42 is an explanatory view showing a display example of the operation instruction image. Here, it is assumed that a jog dial capable of rotational operation is provided. As shown in FIG. 20-42, the operation instruction notification for instructing the rotation operation of the jog dial is performed by displaying the jog dial image 204 imitating the jog dial and the operation instruction image 38SH200d.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-42, in the image display device 5, an operation instruction image 38SH200d including an annular arrow type area surrounding the jog dial image 204 is displayed as a related display. Specifically, the arrow-shaped region includes an arrowhead portion and an arrowhead portion, and the arrowhead portion is annularly formed. In addition, the operation instruction image 38SH200d is configured in such a manner as to include the character string "turn jog!" In the arrow type region.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-42 (1) to (3), in the operation instruction image 38SH 200 d, the character string “Turn Jog!” Is a clock in an annular area formed in an annular shape surrounding the jog dial image 204. It is displayed in such a manner as to move around. By adopting such an aspect, it becomes easy to recognize the content of the operation instruction to rotate the jog dial clockwise, and the operation can be more effectively instructed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-38 to 20-42, a single related display is displayed, but a plurality of related displays in different modes may be displayed in parallel and may be displayed in an overlapping manner. .

FIGS. 20-43 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of a right-handed instruction image and an error notification image.
In the example shown in FIGS. 20-43, in the image display device 5, a right-handed instruction image 38SH200a consisting of a curved area is displayed. The right-handed instruction image 38SH 200 a is configured in such a manner that the character string “→ right-handed right →” is included in the area formed in a curved shape.

  Here, when the full error state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 (2) to (4), the error notification image 38SH200g is displayed as a related display in such a manner as to be superimposed on the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a. The error notification image 38SH200g is displayed in such a manner that the character string "Please pull out the full error ball" moves from the right end to the left end in the rectangular area. With regard to the error notification image 38SH200g, the visibility may be enhanced as an aspect in which the character string does not move, and the error content may be easily recognized.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-43, the error notification image including information with higher priority among the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the error notification image 38SH200g is displayed preferentially (that is, in the upper hierarchy). With such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-43, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the error notification image 38SH200g are displayed in parallel, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the error notification image 38SH200g are superimposed without changing the mode. Although the display is made to display, it may be displayed by changing the shape of one or both or changing the display position. For example, in the case where related displays having an annular and similar shape are displayed in parallel, such as right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and operation instruction image 38SH200d, either one may be changed into a rectangular shape. Alternatively, one or both of the display positions may be changed so as not to overlap. This can facilitate recognition.

  Also, although an example in which the error notification image 38SH200g is superimposed and displayed is shown in FIG. 20-43, the present invention is not limited to this, and the images shown in FIGS. 20-38 to 20-42 are superimposed and displayed. You may do so. For example, the jog dial image 204 may be superimposed and displayed on the right strike instruction image 38SH 200 a.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 20-43, and three or more images may be superimposed and displayed. For example, when an error occurs when the jog dial image 204 is displayed superimposed on the right strike instruction image 38SH200a, the error notification image 38SH200g is superimposed and displayed on the right strike instruction image 38SH200a and the jog dial image 204. You may do so. When a plurality of images are superimposed and displayed, they are superimposed according to a predetermined display priority (for example, the error notification image 38SH200g having a high priority as the content to be notified has a high display priority) It may be set and displayed in the upper hierarchy), or the display priority may be higher in ascending order of display time (that is, an image with a shorter display time may be displayed in the upper hierarchy) The display priority may increase in the order of display in the most recent display (i.e., an image to be displayed later is displayed in the upper hierarchy), or the display priority may increase in the order of small display size (i.e., The image having a small display size may be displayed in the upper layer so as to overlap the large image.

(Additional note on the feature 38SH (63IW))
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine that plays a game, and a display means (for example, display means capable of displaying related display related to a predetermined state (for example, presentation comment image 38SH200c and presentation comment image 38SH200e) The image display device 5) is provided, and the display means can display the related display formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions (for example, the effect commentary image 38SH200c or the like configured by an aspect including a zigzag arrow type region) 20, and the like, for example, a rendering commentary image 38SH 200 e configured by an aspect including a vertically extending area and a horizontally extending area (strictly, an area depicted on a plane that appears to extend horizontally). -40, see Figure 20-41)

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be effectively displayed, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  (2) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine that plays a game, and displays related displays related to a predetermined state (for example, right hitting instruction image 38SH200a, left hitting instruction image 38SH200b, operation instruction image 38SH200d) With possible display means, the display means can display related displays formed in a curvilinear manner (see, for example, FIGS. 20-38, 20-39, and 20-42).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be effectively displayed, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(Description of Feature 38SH and Feature 38SH (63IW) 1)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, comprising display means, the display means being formed to extend in a plurality of directions and being in a predetermined state It is possible to display the related display related to and the specific display, and even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

(Description of Feature 38SH and Feature 38SH (63IW) 2)
Further, the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, comprising display means, the display means being formed in a curvilinear shape and related to a predetermined state The related display and the specific display can be displayed, and even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Description about feature 38SH (39SH) and feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, comprising display means and an operable movable body, and the display means comprises a plurality of display means And a related display related to a predetermined state can be displayed in a predetermined display area, the movable body is operable to at least an operation position overlapping the predetermined display area, and a display of the related display Even when the movable body is in the operating position, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

(Description about feature 38SH (39SH) and feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, comprising display means and an operable movable body, the display means comprising A curvilinearly formed related display related to a predetermined state can be displayed in a predetermined display area, the movable body is operable at least at an operation position overlapping the predetermined display area, and the related display is displayed Even when the movable body is in the operating position, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Description of Feature 38SH (40SH) and Feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, comprising a first display means and a second display means, the first display means The second display means can be configured to extend in a plurality of directions to display related displays related to a predetermined state.

(Description about feature 38SH (40SH) and feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, comprising a first display means and a second display means, It is possible to display a related display which is formed in a curvilinear shape and is related to a predetermined state across the display means and the second display means.

(Description about feature 38SH (41SH) and feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a common change is made to the display means and the plurality of displays displayed on the display means The display means is formed to extend in a plurality of directions and can display a related display related to a predetermined state, and receives a change due to the specific performance as a related display. It is possible to display the first related display and the second related display which is not affected by the specific effect.

(Description about feature 38SH (41SH) and feature 38SH (63IW))
Further, the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is common to the display means and a plurality of displays displayed on the display means The display means is capable of displaying a related display which is formed in a curved shape and is related to a predetermined state, and the display means receives a change due to the specific performance as the related display. It is possible to display the related display and the second related display which is not affected by the specific effect.

(Description of Feature 38SH (42SH) and Feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a common change is made to the display means and a plurality of displays displayed on the display means The display means is configured to extend in a plurality of directions and can display the related display related to the predetermined state in a manner accompanied by an operation, and the related display includes: Even when the specific effect is changed, the display can be displayed in a manner accompanied by the operation.

(Description about feature 38SH (42SH) and feature 38SH (63IW))
Further, the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is common to the display means and a plurality of displays displayed on the display means The display means is capable of displaying a related display which is formed in a curvilinear shape and is related to a predetermined state in a mode accompanied by an action, and the related display is a specific effect which is executed in a specific effect giving the change. Even when it changes by being performed, it can display in the aspect with an operation | movement.

(Description 1 about the feature portion 95AK)
Next, the feature part 95AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic part 95AK is a gaming machine which performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and it is a specific display execution means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display; And a suggestion effect performing means capable of suggesting a suggestion effect to be controlled. The suggestive effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects different in the proportion controlled to the advantageous state. The system further comprises an expectation degree suggestive effect execution means capable of executing an expectation degree suggestive effect that is suggested by displaying an expectation degree suggestion display that is a ratio controlled to an advantageous state due to the execution of the suggestion effect. The expected degree suggestive effect executing means can execute the expected degree suggestive effect of changing the display mode of the expected degree suggested display by the specific display acting on the expected degree suggested display. The specific display in the characteristic part 95AK is a variable display correspondence display (correspondence display) such as a suspension display corresponding to a variable display or an active display, and may be different from the specific display in the other characteristic parts.

(Exemplary operation example 1 of the characteristic unit 95AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation of the characterizing portion 95AK of the present embodiment will be described. Each effect operation in the characteristic part 95AK is realized by the effect control CPU 120 controlling the effect device such as the image display device 5 based on the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect content in the effect control process. FIG. 21A shows an example of the effect operation regarding the feature part 95AK. In the characteristic part 95AK, an active indication as a specific indication acts on the expectation indication, and an expectation indication effect is performed in which the expectation indicated by the expectation indication is improved. Instead of or in addition to the expectation indication in the characteristic part 31AK and the expectation indication in the expectation part, the expectation indication in the characteristic part 95AK may be executed. The description of the portions common to the feature portion 31AK will be omitted. In this example, the specific display is an active display. However, the specific display may be a hold display. That is, the active display can be appropriately replaced with the hold display.

  FIG. 21-1 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the “left”, “middle” and “right” of the image display device 5 ing. In the lower part of the image display device 5, a corresponding display area 95AK010 for displaying a corresponding display (variable display corresponding display) is formed. The correspondence display area 95AK010 includes a first hold display area 95AK011, a second hold display area 95AK012, and an active display area 95AK013.

  The first hold display area 95AK011 is an area for displaying a hold display (a hold display indicating the number of the first hold storage) corresponding to the first special view game. Second hold display area 95AK012, a hold display corresponding to the second special view game (an area for displaying a hold display indicating the first hold storage number. Active display area 95AK013 is an area for displaying an active display It is.

  In the first hold display area 95AK011, four circular hold displays can be displayed in correspondence with the upper limit number of the first hold storage number, and the hold display number 1 from the right in the winning order (order of early consumption), The hold display of display number 2, hold display number 3, and hold display number 4 is displayed. Every time the variable display ends, the pending display with the largest pending display number displayed in the first pending display area 95AK011 is erased, and each pending display is shifted to the position of the smaller pending display number or the active display area 95AK013. Do. In FIG. 21A, the first number of pending storages is three, and three pending displays up to pending display number 3 are displayed in the first pending display area 95AK011. In FIG. 21A, the all white hold display is displayed, but when the notice to change the display mode of the hold display is executed, the corresponding hold display has another color or another color. It may be displayed in a shape.

  In the second hold display area 95AK012, four circular hold displays can be displayed in correspondence with the upper limit number of the second hold storage number, and the hold display number 1 from the left in the winning order (order of early consumption), The hold display of display number 2, hold display number 3, and hold display number 4 is displayed. In FIG. 21A, the second pending storage number is 0, and no pending display is displayed in the second pending display area 95AK012.

  In the active display area 95AK013, one active display corresponding to the variable display in progress can be displayed. Every time the variable display ends, the active display displayed in the active display area 95AK013 is erased, and when there is a hold display, the hold display displayed in the hold display number 1 is shifted so that the active display area is shifted. The active indication is displayed again on 95AK013. When a notice to change the display mode of the active display is executed, the active display is displayed in a mode different in color or shape from the mode at the normal time (for example, the white circle display same as the hold display). The display mode (shape and size) at the normal time of the active display may be the same as the hold display, or the shape or size may be different.

  In FIG. 21A, a black star-shaped active display 95AK001 is displayed in the active display area 95AK013. The normal-time display mode of the active display is the same white circular display as the hold display. When the expected degree suggestive effect of the characteristic part 95AK is executed, the display mode is changed to the special mode of the black star at the start of the variable display (when the hold display shifts to the active display). ing. The timing at which the display mode changes is not limited to this as long as it is before the expected degree suggestion effect is performed, and may be any timing.

  After that, for example, the decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 on the "left" and "right" stops and becomes a reach mode, and becomes a super reach D as shown in FIG. 21-1 (B). As shown in FIG. 21-1 (B), while the title 95AK021 (here, the letter “SP reach D”) of Super Reach D is displayed on a part of the center of the image display device 5, By outputting a voice corresponding to the title (here, "kill the enemy"), the title of Super Reach D is notified. Further, under the title 95AK021, an expectation degree indication 95AK022 indicating the degree of expectation of the reach is displayed. Here, the degree of expectation is an index indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match with the big hit reliability of the reach.

  In FIG. 21-1 (B), five white star expectation indication 95AK022 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-1 (C), a black star 95AK003 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 95AK022 is displayed. At this time, the active display 95 AK 001 is enlarged to a size larger than the star of the expected degree indication 95 AK 022, moves in a floating manner on the screen, and stops at the right side of the screen.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 21-1 (D), an effect is performed such that the black star 95AK003 moves and fits in one of the white stars of the expectation degree indication 95AK022. At this time, an audio "pin" indicating that the black star indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. Note that the audio output is not essential and may not be output. As shown in FIGS. 21-1 (E) and (F), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) outputted from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars).

  The example of the rendering operation shown in FIG. 21-1 has the features described in FIG. 12 and the like except that there is a corresponding display area 95AK010 and that the expectation degree suggestive rendering of the characteristic portion 95AK described below is executed. It is the same as that of the example production | presentation operation example of the expectation degree suggestion production of part 31AK. In the expected degree suggestive effect of the characteristic portion 31AK shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), the expected degree suggestive effect is finished at this stage, but in the expected degree suggestive effect in the characteristic portion 95AK, FIG. As shown in −1 (G), an effect is performed such that the active display 95 AK 001 moves (actions) and falls within one of the white stars of the expectation indication 95 AK 022. At this time, an audio "pin" indicating that the black star indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8.

  In the above embodiment and the present embodiment, it is expressed that the effect such as the active display moves to the effect with the expectation degree indication and causes a collision or interference.

  Note that the sound output when the active display acts on the expected degree indication is different from the sound output when the image of another star acts (FIGS. 21-1 (D) and (F)). May be

  After that, when the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 95AK022 (the stage when the active indication has ended), as shown in FIG. 21-1 (H), the black star lights up And so on. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect is finished.

  As described above, the expectation degree suggestive effect of the characteristic part 95AK is a chance-up production that further improves the expectation of super reach suggested by the expectation degree suggestive effect of the characteristic part 31AK (FIGS. 12A to 12E). It has become. By performing such an effect, the effect of the effect is improved, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the active indication (specific indication) acts on the expectation indication, and the expectation indicated by the expectation indication is improved, it is possible to execute an unexpected presentation. In addition, whether or not to execute the effect of causing the active indication (specific display) to act on the expectation degree indication as the effect of chance up and increase the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree indication is, for example, to execute super reach. In the case of a corresponding fluctuation pattern, the effect control board 12 may determine the variable display result based on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Therefore, even in the case of the super reach D, when it is decided not to execute the effect of increasing the expectation, the number of black stars in the expectation indication is two. In the case where the number of black stars in the expected degree indication is the same in the case where the effect of increasing the expected degree is performed and in the case where the effect is not performed, the expected degree is increased (the chance of increasing The probability (big hit reliability) may be higher in the case where the effect is executed is a big hit. For example, the super reach D in which the chance-up effect is executed may have a higher jackpot reliability than the super reach C in which the chance-up effect is not executed. By doing this, the player can expect that the chance-up effect will be executed even if the reach with a low expectation level is started, and the interest is improved.

  In addition to improving the degree of expectation indicated by the expected degree indication, the reach title may be changed to a reach title corresponding to a reach with a higher degree of expectation. That is, the development effect in which the reach is developed (promoted) may be executed by the active indication (specific indication) acting on the expectation degree indication. In addition, after performing the expected degree suggestive production of the characteristic portion 31AK (between FIG. 21-1 (F) and (G)), it is emphasized that the black star is once illuminated and the expected degree is determined You may show it. By doing this, it is possible to emphasize that the chance has been raised by the expected degree suggestive effect of the characteristic portion 95AK, and the effect of the effect is improved.

(Exemplary operation example 2 for the characteristic part 95AK)
FIG. 21-2 shows another example rendering operation relating to the feature portion 95AK. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  In this example, the black star 95AK003 is displayed, and the effect that the black star 95AK003 moves and fits within one of the white stars of the expectation indication 95AK022 is omitted, and FIGS. 21-2 (A), (B) As shown in FIG. 21-1 (A) and (B), after the rendering operation similar to that of FIG. 21-1 (C), as shown in FIG. It stops on the right side, and as shown in FIG. 21-2 (D), an effect is performed such that the active indication 95AK 001 acts to fit in the white star of the expectation indication 95 AK 022. At this time, the black star in the expectation indication 95AK022 is increased to three at a stretch, and the speaker 8 outputs an audio "pin pin pin" indicating that the black star indicating the expectation has increased by three. Thus, by outputting the voice "pin" three times, it becomes easy to grasp the number of stages at which the degree of expectation has increased. The tone of the sound may be changed stepwise when the voice "pin" is output three times. Also, the same voice ("pin") as in the other cases may be output. After that, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (E), the black star is highlighted as if it were illuminated.

  Expectation degree suggestion production like production operation example 2 may be made to be performed alternatively with expectation degree suggestion production shown, for example in Drawing 12 (A)-(F). For example, one of the expectation degree indication effects may be performed according to an actual variable display result or the like. 12 (A) to 12 (F) in the case where there is an expectation degree indication effect in which the active display acts on the expectation degree indication display than in the case where a normal expectation degree indication effect is performed. Since a higher degree of expectation is suggested, the player is to pay attention to whether an expected degree indication effect in which the active indication acts on the expected degree indication is performed or whether the active indication changes to a special mode. The player's expectation can be improved.

  As described above, in the feature portion 95AK, when the expectation indication that the active display acts on the expectation indication is performed, the active display is the same display as the indication indicating the expectation in the expectation indication. It changes to a special aspect of a black star shape. As a result, when the active display changes to the special form of the black star, it is predicted / predicted that the expectation indication indicating rendering will be performed, and that the reach will be suggested (super reach) prior to that. be able to. Therefore, the player can pay attention to whether the active display changes to the special mode, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, although the active display changed to the black star-shaped special mode, there may be a case where the expectation degree indication effect or the super reach is not performed. In addition, the active display may be changed to a special aspect other than the black star, in which case the execution ratio of the indication indicating the degree of expectation and the super reach differs between the black star and the special aspect other than that (for example, The execution rate is higher for black stars.

(Modification of feature portion 95AK)
In addition, the characteristic part 95AK is not limited to what was demonstrated here, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. In addition, the features of the feature portion 31AK described in the above embodiment may be adopted as the feature portion 95AK.

  In the expectation degree indication effect of the present embodiment, after the specific indication (active indication) changes to the special mode, after the active indication moves from the active display area 95AK013, the expectation degree indication indication is acted. However, the specific indication (active indication, hold indication) may be made to act on the expectation indication without changing to the special mode, or the specific indication may be displayed on the expectation indication without moving from the corresponding display area 95AK010. You may make it act.

  In addition, when anticipation indication is made to act on the expectation indication indicating the hold indication as a specific indication, a plurality of specific indications (a plurality of hold indication, hold indication and active indication, etc.) act on the expectation indication You may perform an expectation degree suggestion production to do. When it is made to act on the expectation indication after changing the specific display to the special mode, it can be suggested that the expectation degree is high when the plurality of specific displays change to the special mode, so the stage effect Improve. In addition, it is possible to easily change to a special mode when the number of pending displays is large, and in this case, it is possible to promote the game of the player and to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. When a plurality of specific indications act on the expectation indication, the expectation indication indicated by the expectation indication may or may not increase. A plurality of special modes in which the specific indication changes may be provided, and the rate at which the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree indication increases may be varied depending on which special mode is used. In addition, what is necessary is just to be executed by the ratio and presentation pattern which can appropriately indicate the expectation which will be a big hit, and the expectation degree suggestive effect of the present embodiment and the modification, based on whether the actual variable display result is a big hit etc. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of the execution of the expectation degree indication effect and the effect pattern.

  Moreover, how to make specific indication act on expectation degree indication display is not limited to what specific indication acts on expectation degree indication display directly as in the present embodiment, and other effect images (from specific indication ( For example, an image of a star, a bullet, etc.) may be operated. In this case, an effect in which the effect image acts a plurality of times with respect to the expectation degree indication from the one specific indication may be performed. In this way, even after the effect image acts on the expectation degree indication display once, the player can expect that the effect image further acts to improve the expectation degree, so that the interest of the game is improved. .

  For example, the specific indication (active indication, hold indication) may be changed to an image of two or more stars or half stars, and the indication may act on the expectation indication. In addition, the specific indication may be changed to a special mode other than a star shape, or the active indication may be operated on the expectation indication without changing. In this case, the sound outputted at that time may be made different depending on the type and the number of the active indication (specific indication) to be operated. Also, the same sound may be output regardless of the type and number of active displays (specific displays) that operate. The sound may be changed stepwise depending on the number of active displays (specific displays) that operate.

  In addition, the presentation mode before the active indication (specific indication) acts on the expectation degree indication is not limited to the one that moves after the active indication moves as in the present embodiment and then stops. It is sufficient if the indication acts on the expectation indication. For example, the screen may be swung or moved (drifting) until the active display works. Furthermore, when the active display drifts, it is displayed in a larger size than the star image in the expectation indication, but the display size may be arbitrary.

  In addition, for example, a specific indication (active indication, hold indication) may be operated to execute an expectation degree indication effect such as to gradually reduce the expectation degree indication. In addition, notification of the title of the super reach may be performed when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the reach effect of the super reach.

  Further, when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, the corresponding display area 95AK010 may be erased and only the specific display may be left. By doing this, it becomes easier to pay attention to the expectation degree indication effect. In this case, after the expectation degree suggestion effect ends, the corresponding display area 95AK010 may be redisplayed.

  Even after the notification of the title of the super reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (I) and (J), when the display of the title and the expectation degree indication is continued, the specific indication acts on the expectation degree indication. The expected degree suggestive effect of 95AK may be executed.

  When the specific display (active display, hold display) changes to the special mode, the player is prompted to operate the operation means such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and the specific display is special mode at the timing when the operation is detected. It may be changed to When an operation is not detected, it may be changed to a special mode with the passage of time, or an expectation degree suggestion effect of causing a specific display to be performed may not be performed. In the case of not performing the expected degree suggestive effect that causes the specific display to act, the operation of the player can be promoted, and the effect of the effect is improved.

(Additional note on feature part 95AK)
(1) The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 95AK performs variable display, and is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Specific display execution means (for example, corresponding display area 95AK010) capable of displaying the specified display (for example, active display, hold display) and suggestive effects (for example, reach effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state can be performed Suggestive effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control), and the suggestive effect executing means can execute plural kinds of the suggestive effects having different proportions controlled to the advantageous state (for example, for Super Reach A to E It is a reach effect), and indicates a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by the execution of the suggested effect by displaying an expectation degree indication It is further equipped with expectation degree suggestion presentation execution means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) which can execute expectation degree suggestion production (for example, FIG. 9 (H)-(J), FIG. 12, FIG. 21-1 and FIG. The expected degree suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the expected degree suggestive effect of changing the display mode of the expected degree suggested display by the specific display acting on the expected degree suggested display (for example, FIG. 21-1). , Figure 21-2).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the expected degree suggestive effect executing means may step-by-step a predetermined number of specific images according to a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by executing the suggestive effect. By displaying, the expectation degree indication may be displayed, and audio corresponding to the display of the specific image may be output (for example, FIG. 12, FIG. 21-1, and FIG. 21-2).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (2), the expected degree suggestive effect executing means can suggest a proportion to be controlled to the advantageous state by the number of specific images to be displayed, and the first predetermined number of specific images The same sound may be output when the is displayed and when the second predetermined number of specific images are displayed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the above (2), the expected degree suggestive effect executing means can suggest a proportion to be controlled to the advantageous state by the number of specific images to be displayed, and the first predetermined number of specific images It may be possible to output different sounds at the time when is displayed and when the second predetermined number of specific images are displayed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4), the sound to be output may be changed stepwise depending on the number of the specific images displayed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the expected degree suggestive effect executing unit displays the specific image in a predetermined size, and then the specific image is displayed in a predetermined display area. The expected degree suggestive effect to move may be executable (for example, FIG. 12 (B) to (E), (H) to (K), FIG. 21-1 and FIG. 21-2).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), the expected degree suggestive effect executing means is a predetermined number according to a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by executing the suggestive effect. The expectation degree indication effect may be made executable by reducing and displaying the specific image of the step by step.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), further comprising: title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect; The title corresponding to the suggested effect may be notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 9 (D), (F)). )).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(Description 1 about the feature portion 96AK)
Next, the feature portion 96AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 96AK is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes display means for performing display and display control means for performing control of displaying an image on the display means. The display control means can display the first image and the second image as images relating to the progress of the game on the display means, and can display the predetermined image and the pseudo-feature image as the effect image on the display means is there. In the display control means, in the display means, the priority of the first image is higher than that of the predetermined image, that of the first image is higher than that of the first image, and that of the second image is higher than that of the first image. You can display those images to be Then, the display control means can display the pseudo product image so as to pass on the first image but not on the second image.

(Exemplary operation example 1 concerning the feature portion 96AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation of the feature portion 96AK of the present embodiment will be described. Each rendering operation in the characteristic portion 96AK is realized by the rendering control CPU 120 controlling the rendering device such as the image display device 5 based on the rendering control pattern corresponding to each rendering content in the rendering control process. The characteristic portion 96AK can display the first image and the second image relating to the progress of the game on the image display device 5, and can also display a predetermined image and a simulated character image as effects images. Then, control is performed so that the display priority order in the image display device 5 is “predetermined image <first image <pseudo role image <second image”. When the display position in the image display apparatus 5 overlaps, it controls so that the image with a high priority is displayed on the near side. For example, when each image is divided into a plurality of layers and displayed, an image having a high priority may be displayed on the upper layer. Further, it is possible to display the simulated character image so as to pass over the first image and not pass over the second image. In this way, after ensuring the visibility of the second image with a high degree of importance, it is possible to make the pseudo-feature image look like an actual feature.

  In the present embodiment, the first image is a hold display, an active display or a decorative pattern. The second image is the fourth pattern. Further, the predetermined image is a background image, a character image of a notice effect or a reach effect, a decorative pattern, a corresponding display area, and the pseudo character image is an image imitating a character (movable object, structure). Since the decorative symbol is an image relating to the progress of the game and an image for effect, it may be classified into either the first image or the predetermined image. Further, the corresponding display area (pending display area, active display area) may be classified into the first image. The actual character serving as the base of the simulated character image may be, for example, a movable object used for rendering, or a structure used with the decorative member of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 21C illustrates an example of the effect operation regarding the feature portion 96AK. A fourth symbol display area for displaying a fourth symbol for a first special symbol as a display region of a fourth symbol on the image display device 5 of the characteristic portion 96AK as shown in FIG. 21-3 (A) 96AK001 and a fourth symbol display area 96AK002 for displaying a fourth symbol for a second special symbol are provided. The fourth symbol is the fourth symbol following the decorative symbol, the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol, and is a symbol that performs variable display in synchronization with variable display of the special symbol. Here, the synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same, and the periods of the variable display coincide with each other.

  The fourth symbol display area 96AK001 and the fourth symbol display area 96AK002 (the fourth symbol) are provided in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The priority of display is higher than character images of reach effects, decorative symbols, and variable display of decorative symbols is being performed, or even when various effects are being performed by the image display device 5, The display state of the 4th symbol is always possible. Even if the visibility of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is poor and it is difficult to confirm whether the variable symbol of the special symbol is displayed, whether or not the variable symbol of the special symbol is being displayed by securing the visibility of the fourth symbol. Can be confirmed by the player. The fourth symbol is the second image with the highest display priority, because it is important to ensure visibility in this manner.

  In the fourth symbol display area 96AK001 for the first special symbol, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the display and non-display of the fourth symbol of a predetermined display color is repeated (blinking). Execute variable display of the fourth symbol. In the fourth symbol display area for the first special symbol, when the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, the fourth symbol of a predetermined display color is always in the display state, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is also stopped. .

  In the fourth symbol display area 96AK002 for the second special symbol, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, repeating the display and non-display of the fourth symbol of the display color different from that for the first symbol ( Execute the variable display of the fourth symbol by blinking). In the fourth symbol display area for the second special symbol, when the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the fourth symbol of the display color different from that for the first symbol always becomes the display state, and the fourth symbol of The variable display also stops.

  FIG. 21-3 (A) shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 ing. In the lower part of the image display device 5, a corresponding display area 96AK010 for displaying a corresponding display (variable display corresponding display) is formed. The correspondence display area 96AK010 includes a first hold display area 96AK011, a second hold display area 96AK012, and an active display area 96AK013.

  The first hold display area 96AK011 is an area for displaying a hold display (a hold display indicating the number of the first hold storage) corresponding to the first special view game. Second hold display area 96AK012, a hold display corresponding to the second special view game (an area for displaying a hold display indicating the first hold storage number. Active display area 96AK013 is an area for displaying an active display It is.

  In the first hold display area 96AK011, four circular hold displays can be displayed in correspondence with the upper limit number of the first hold storage number, and the hold display number 1 from the right in the winning order (order of early consumption), The hold display of display number 2, hold display number 3, and hold display number 4 is displayed. Every time the variable display ends, the pending display with the largest pending display number displayed in the first pending display area 96AK011 is erased, and each pending display is shifted to the position of the smaller pending display number or the active display area 96AK013. Do. In FIG. 21-3 (A), the first number of pending storages is three, and three pending indications up to pending display number 3 are displayed in the first pending display area 96AK011. In FIG. 21-3 (A), the all white hold display is displayed, but when the notice to change the display mode of the hold display is executed, the corresponding hold display has another color or another color. It may be displayed in a shape.

  In the second hold display area 96AK012, four circular hold displays can be displayed in correspondence with the upper limit number of the second hold storage number, and the hold display number 1 from the left in the winning order (order of early consumption), The hold display of display number 2, hold display number 3, and hold display number 4 is displayed. In FIG. 21-3 (A), the second pending storage number is 0, and no pending display is displayed in the second pending display area 96AK012.

  In the active display area 96AK013, one active display corresponding to the variable display in progress can be displayed. Every time the variable display ends, the active display displayed in the active display area 96AK013 is erased, and when there is a hold display, the hold display displayed in the hold display number 1 is shifted so that the active display area is shifted. The active display is displayed again on the 96AK013. When a notice to change the display mode of the active display is executed, the active display is displayed in a mode different in color or shape from the mode at the normal time (for example, the white circle display same as the hold display). The display mode (shape and size) at the normal time of the active display may be the same as the hold display, or the shape or size may be different. In FIG. 21-3A, a white circular active display is displayed in the active display area 95AK013. The hold display or the active display is the first image with low display priority.

  Here, in the case of executing the preview effect for displaying the simulated character image on the image display 5, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), the front end of the background image 96AK014 from the left end portion of the image display 5 The simulated character image 96AK020 is displayed on the screen. At this time, the simulated character image 96AK020 is displayed so that it can be seen from the left end portion of the image display device 5, and the simulated character image 96AK020 moves to the right. At the stage shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), only a part of the simulated character image 96AK020 is displayed. By doing so, it can appear as if a real thing appeared from the left side direction of the image display device 5, and the rendering effect is improved. In addition, a structure such as a cover or a guide is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 is installed on the back side of the game board 2 to make the depth direction three-dimensional (a real thing By providing a space to fit, it can be seen that features appear from the left direction of the image display device 5, and it can appear as if a real feature appears from the left direction of the image display device 5 it can. Further, in order to enhance the three-dimensional effect of the simulated character image 96AK020, a 3D image may be displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21C, by moving the simulated character image 96AK020 to the right, the entire simulated character image 96AK020 is displayed. At this time, the pseudo-feature image 96AK020 is displayed (preferentially) in front of the background image 96AK014, the hold display (the first hold display area 96AK011), and the decorative pattern. By doing this, it can appear as if the simulated character image 96AK020 is a real character (movable object) moving on the front side of the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 21C, the simulated character product image 96AK020 includes a main member image 96AK021 simulating a character and a shaft member image 96AK022 simulating a shaft supporting the character. By displaying the shaft member image 96AK 022 in this manner, it is possible to make it appear that a real thing is working. The main member image 96AK021 may perform an operation such as rotation in accordance with the movement of the simulated character image 96AK020 to the right. In addition, the main member image 96AK021 may be displayed so as to include a lamp, and effects may be performed such that the lamp is lit. In addition, a vibration motor is provided in the effect member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is vibrated according to the movement of the simulated role product image 96AK020 to the right. It may be vibrated by outputting a deep bass. By doing this, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 21-3 (D) to (F), the simulated character product image 96AK020 is a background image 96AK014, a hold display or an active display (second hold display area 96AK012, active display area 96AK013) or a decorative pattern It moves to the right while it is displayed on the front side more than it does, and disappears to the right of the image display device 5 as if it appeared, as if to be visible. Also on the right side of the image display device 5, it may be emphasized that the actual character appears to disappear on the right side of the image display device 5 by making the depth direction three-dimensional by providing a structure etc. .

  As shown in FIG. 21-3 (F), the dummy character image 96AK020 should not pass above (the near side) the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area 96AK001 and the fourth symbol display area 96AK002. It has become. When the simulated character image 96AK020 on the fourth symbol, which is the second image with the highest display priority, passes, the fourth symbol is displayed on the simulated character image 96AK020, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. While being given, the three-dimensional effect of the simulated character image 96AK020 is impaired. Therefore, the simulated character image 96AK020 can be rendered such that the artificial character image 96AK020 can be shown as a real character while preventing such inconveniences by preventing the object from passing above the fourth pattern. .

(Exemplary operation example 2 for the feature portion 96AK)
Subsequently, another rendering operation example of the characteristic portion 96AK of the present embodiment will be described. In another rendering operation example of the characteristic portion 96AK shown in FIG. 21-4, a sub-image display device 96AK004 is provided adjacent to the image display device 5. The sub image display device 96AK 004 is configured of an LCD, an organic EL, or the like, and can display various effect images under the control of the effect control CPU 120. In this example, the sub-image display device 96AK 004 is installed to be inclined with respect to the player side.

  In this rendering operation example, the fourth symbol display area 96AK001 and the fourth symbol display area 96AK002 are provided in the sub-image display device 96AK004. As described above, since the fourth symbol is displayed on the sub image display device 96AK 004 independent of the image display device 5 on which the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol or the effect operation of reach effect is executed, the player can Is easier to understand.

  Some effect images may be displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK 004. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-4, a character image 96AK003, which is a predetermined image for effect such as a preview effect, is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK004. There is. On the other hand, the pseudo character feature image 96AK020 is displayed in the image display device 5, and is not displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 96AK004. Even when the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 96AK 004 are disposed adjacent to each other, the continuity of the image is cut off by the frame at the joint portion or the formation of the step. Therefore, as in this display operation example, the pseudo role image 96AK020 imitating a real role is not displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 96AK 004, so that the pseudo role is not performed. It is possible to prevent the continuity of the object image 96AK020 from being cut off, giving a sense of incongruity to the image, making it invisible as a real role, and preventing the stereoscopic effect of the image from being lost.

Further, since the secondary image display device 96AK 004 is inclined toward the player side, displaying the simulated character image 96 AK 020 on this side gives the player an uncomfortable feeling that the image looks distorted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by not displaying the dummy role image 96AK020 on the secondary image display device 96AK 004 inclined toward the player. Note that by adjusting the appearance (such as the display angle of the solid surface) of the simulated character image 96AK020 according to the inclination angle with respect to the player side, the pseudo character image 96AK020 is inclined while preventing the occurrence of discomfort. May also be displayed. However, by displaying the dummy character image 96AK020 only on the screen that is not inclined, it is not necessary to make such adjustments, and the control load can be reduced.

(Exemplary operation example 3 concerning the characteristic part 96AK)
As in another rendering operation example of the characteristic portion 96AK shown in FIG. 21-5, the error notification image 96AK005 for notifying that an error has occurred is preferentially displayed on the front side with respect to the pseudo product image 96AK020. . By doing this, it is possible to preferably notify the player of an error.

  Whether or not to display the error notification image 96AK005 prior to the simulated character image 96AK020 may be divided according to the type of the error that has occurred. For example, for a high degree error such as a magnetic error or an incorrect prize error, the error notification image 96AK005 is displayed prior to the simulated character image 96AK020 while the false continuable character such as an operation error of the rendering device is displayed. The image 96AK020 may be displayed in priority to the error notification image 96AK005. By doing this, it is possible to preferably execute the effect by the simulated role product image 96AK020 while preferably performing error notification.

(Exemplary operation example 4 concerning the characteristic part 96AK)
In addition to the simulated character image 96AK020, an effect using a real character may be executed. FIG. 21-6 illustrates another example rendering operation relating to the feature portion 96AK in the case of executing rendering using a real product. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  In the case of executing the notice effect for operating the character, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. A special character 96AK060 for effect stored on the left side appears, and moves on the front side of the image display device 5 to the right. At the stage shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), the left portion of the character 96AK060 is covered by the cover on the near side and the game board 2, and only the right portion of the character 96AK060 is visible.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (C), by moving the accessory 96AK060 in the right direction, the entire accessory 96AK060 becomes visible. At this time, since the character 96AK060 is moved to the near side of the image display device 5, it is on the near side of the hold display (the first hold display area 96AK011) and the decorative symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 21-6 (C), the character 96AK060 is, similarly to the simulated character image 96AK020, composed of a main member 96AK061 imitating a character and a shaft member 96AK062 for supporting the character. The main member 96AK061 may perform an operation such as rotation in accordance with the rightward movement of the character 96AK060. In addition, the main member 96AK061 may be configured to include a lamp so that the lamp may be lit. Further, according to the operation of the accessory 96AK060, a vibration operation such as a vibration by a vibration motor or a vibration by a deep bass output may be performed. By doing this, the rendering effect is improved.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 21-6 (D) to (F), the accessory 96AK060 moves the front side of the image display device 5 to the right, and the right side of the image display device 5 as in the appearance. It disappears to make it disappear.

  As described above, in the feature portion 96AK, the effect of displaying the simulated character image 96AK020 imitating the actual character 96AK060 is executed, so that the effect of presentation is improved. In the case of executing the effect that the actual character 96AK060 operates, the effect of displaying the simulated character image 96AK020 may not be performed. For example, any of the effects may be executed alternatively to make the jackpot reliability different when each effect is performed. In addition, even when the operation of the character 96AK060 is stopped, even when the movement is stopped at the advanced position, etc., while the effect using the character 96AK060 is being performed, the effect of displaying the simulated character image 96AK020 is not performed. It is also good. In addition, although the effect of operating the actual character 96AK060 is normally executed, the effect using the simulated character image 96AK020 may be executed as a substitute effect when the character 96AK060 is defective. Note that the effect of operating the actual character 96AK060 and the effect of displaying the simulated character image 96AK020 may be simultaneously executed.

  Also, the simulated character image 96AK020 is designed to perform the same display operation as that of the character 96AK060, but the simulated character image is an image resembling a character and performs different rendering operations. It may be. Moreover, although the prize is provided in any place of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it may be a prize which does not operate.

(Modification of feature portion 96AK)
In addition, the characteristic part 96AK is not limited to what was demonstrated here, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention.

  In the present embodiment, the first image is the hold display, the active display, and the decorative pattern, but the first image may be an image that may not always be visible among images relating to the progress of the game. For example, the first image may be a display indicating a gaming state, a display indicating that a big hit is in progress, a table of a big hit round, a reach title, an expected degree display, or the like. In addition, the first image may be a related display (such as a telop image excluding an error telop image) of the feature portion 38SH. That is, the simulated character image may be displayed with priority over the related display (such as a telop image excluding an error telop image) of the feature portion 38SH.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the second image is the fourth symbol, but the second image may be any image relating to the progress of the game that is desirably visible at all times. For example, the second image may be a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol in motion, a right-handed instruction image, or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined image is the background image, the character image of the notice effect or the reach effect, the decorative pattern, the corresponding display area, but the effect image other than the pseudo role image is the predetermined image Good. In addition, the predetermined image may be related display (such as a telop image excluding an error telop image) of the feature portion 38SH.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of simulated character image. However, there may be a plurality of simulated character images imitating a real character. When a plurality of simulated character image is provided, the plurality of simulated character images may not be displayed simultaneously or may not be displayed at the overlapping position. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-feature image from being obscured by actual features. In addition, you may make it perform the production | presentation which interlock | cooperates a some pseudo | simulated role thing image. For example, a simulated character image may be made to appear from different directions, and effects such as combining a plurality of simulated character images may be performed. By executing such an effect, the effect of the effect can be improved. Further, a member image imitating a member supporting a real product is not limited to the shaft member image, and may be an image of a rail, a frame or the like. Further, the member image may be a harness or wiring connected to a real product. In this case, the pseudo character (member image) can be made to look more like a real thing by displaying the harness or wiring to expand and contract or bend when the pseudo character image operates. The effect is improved. The character that becomes the base of the simulated character image is not limited to the one with the real character on the gaming machine, but may be one that imitates a well-known structure, character, or motif, or the past game It may be an imitation of the property used on the machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub image display device 96AK 004 is provided adjacent to the upper right portion of the image display device 5, but the installation position, the number of installation, and the presence or absence of inclination may be arbitrary. Further, the sub image display device 96AK 004 may not be necessary.

(Additional note on feature part 96AK)
(1) The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 96AK is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1), and a display means (for example, the image display device 5) for performing display and an image on the display means Display control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing control to display the first image (for example, hold display, active display, decoration) on the display means as an image relating to the progress of the game on the display means A symbol image etc. and a second image (eg the fourth symbol, a small symbol etc) can be displayed, and a predetermined image (eg background image 96AK014, a character image of a notice effect or a reach effect) as an effect image on the display means , A display pattern, corresponding display area 96AK010, etc.) and a simulated character image (for example, a simulated character image 96AK020) can be displayed, and the priority order in the display means However, the first image is higher than the predetermined image, the pseudo-feature image is higher than the first image, and the second image is higher than the pseudo-feature image. It can be displayed, and can be displayed so that the pseudo-feature image passes over the first image and does not pass over the second image (for example, FIG. 21-3).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the simulated bonus product image may be displayed so as to be invisible at the end of the display area of the display means (for example, FIG. 21-3 (B), ( F)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), there are a plurality of the display means (for example, the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 96AK004), and the predetermined image (for example, the character image 96AK003) is a plurality of the display The pseudo combination product image may not be displayed across a plurality of display means while being displayable across the means.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the display means is plural (for example, the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 96AK004). The pseudo character image may be displayed on the display means that is not inclined (for example, the pseudo character image 96AK020 is displayed on the image display device 5).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4), the simulated character image may include a simulated member image (for example, a shaft member image 96AK022).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), it may be possible to execute a vibration operation in accordance with the display operation of the pseudo product image.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), an operable movable body (for example, character 96AK060) is provided, and the pseudo character image is not displayed while the movable body is in operation. You may
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), an error display (for example, the error notification image 96AK005) may be displayed with priority over the pseudo role image (for example, FIG. 21). -5).
According to such a configuration, the error display can be appropriately displayed.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8), the movable movable member (for example, the character 96AK060) is provided, and the simulated character image is an image imitating the movable member. (For example, FIG. 21-3, FIG. 21-6).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (9), the display means is a related display related to a predetermined state (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 notifying that a big hit middle effect is being performed). Etc.) and a specific display (for example, right-handed instruction image 38SH20 etc.), and even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized (for example, Even when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed superimposed on the telop image 38SH10, the contents of the telop image 38SH10 may be made recognizable by moving the character information 38SH11 of the telop image 38SH10, etc. Supplementary note (1) regarding the feature portion 38SH.
According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (10), the game machine comprises an operable movable body (for example, movable body 32 etc.), and the display means It can be displayed in the display area (for example, the zone telop image 38SH 30 for notifying that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 etc.) The movable body is operable at an operating position overlapping at least the predetermined display area (for example, the movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed) Etc.), even when the movable body is in the operating position while displaying the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized (for example, zone telop image 38SH3). Even when the movable body 32 is in front of the display area on the left during display of the text, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30) (Appendix (1) regarding the feature 39SH).
According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (11), the first display means (for example, the image display device 5 etc.) and the second display means (for example the sub image display device 38SH5A etc.) It is possible to display related displays related to a predetermined state across the first display means and the second display means (for example, pre-reading zone effect over the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A) And the like may be displayed (notice of the feature 40SH).
According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (12), a special effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for executing a specific effect for giving common changes to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means. Is capable of executing a reduction effect to reduce a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate, and the like, and the display means is a related display (for example, a big hit related to a predetermined state) It is possible to display a big hit telop image 38SH10 notifying that the middle effect is being executed and an error telop image 38SH90 etc. notifying an abnormality that the lower plate is full, and the related display may be based on the specific effect. The first related display that receives a change (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 that receives a change due to a reduction effect, and the like) and the second relation that does not receive a change due to the specific effect Display (e.g., error telop image 38SH90 like not undergo changes due to reduced effect) may also be a can display and (Supplementary Note regarding features 41SH (1)).
According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (13), a special effect unit (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a specific effect that gives common changes to a plurality of displays displayed on the display unit. Is capable of executing a reduction effect to reduce a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate, and the like, and the display unit operates the related display associated with the predetermined state. It is possible to display in an accompanying manner (for example, to display a big hit telop image 38SH10 notifying that the big hit is being performed during a big hit, etc. in a moving manner of the character information 38SH11, etc.) Even when it is changed by being executed, it can be displayed in a mode accompanied by an operation (for example, even when it is changed by executing blurring effect, the character information 38SH11 is MAY be like) is displayed in a manner that dynamic (Supplementary Note regarding features 42SH (1)).
According to such a configuration, the related display can be displayed more suitably.

(Description related to relating feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the features 95AK and 96AK may be combined partially or entirely as appropriate. In addition, each configuration related to the feature parts 95AK and 96AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to the other feature parts (31AK, 38SH). The features combined in this way or the individual features not combined may be combined with part or all of the configurations related to other features as appropriate. For example, the supplementary notes on the characteristic part 95AK and the constitutions of the supplementary notes on the characteristic part 95AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the constitutions of the other characteristic parts.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... game effect lamp 10 ... general winning opening 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... relay board 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A, 22B ... start opening Switch 23 ... count switch 30 ... hitting operation handle 31A ... stick controller 31 B ... push button 32 ... movable body 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player,
A specific display execution means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
A suggestion effect performing means capable of suggesting a suggestion effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
The suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects which are different in proportion to be controlled to the advantageous state,
An expectation degree suggestive effect execution means capable of executing an expectation degree suggestive effect that can be suggested by displaying an expectation degree suggestion display, by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display, a ratio controlled in the advantageous state by the execution of the suggestion effect.
The expected degree suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the expected degree suggestive effect of changing the display mode of the expected degree suggested display by the specific display acting on the expected degree suggested display. .